CITY OF CUMMING SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS€¦ · 8.04 Proposal security of other Proposers that Owner...

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE

CITY OF CUMMING

SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS

PROPOSAL READY AUGUST 26, 2020

Prepared By:

CITY OF CUMMING – 08/26/2020 SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 10

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 11 19 00 21 16 00 42 13 00 43 13 00 45 16 00 45 47 00 51 00 00 52 13 00 55 00 00 61 14 00 61 15 00 62 15 00 62 16 00 63 63 00 65 19 00 72 00 00 73 00

Request for Proposals Instructions To Proposers Proposal Form Proposal Bond Statement of Proposer’s Qualifications Security and Immigration Compliance Act Certification Notice of Award Standard Form of Agreement Notice To Proceed Performance Bond Payment Bond Certificate of Owner’s Attorney Certificate of Owner’s Insurance Change Order Form Final Lien Waiver General Conditions Supplementary Conditions

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 22 00 Measurement and Payment 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL

26 00 00 General Electrical Provisions 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 26 05 19 Electric Wires and Cables 26 05 33 Electric Boxes 26 05 34 Conduit


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 10

Page 2 of 2

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 17 Remote Monitoring Workstations

28 05 19 Network Video Recorder 28 05 19.15 Network Video Recorders 28 15 23.17 Audio Video Intercom 28 21 13 Multisensor Network Cameras 28 21 14 IP Cameras 28 21 14.1 IP Cameras 28 21 14.2 IP Cameras 28 21 15 IP PTZ Cameras 28 21 16 Outdoor Dome Cameras 28 23 00 Video Management System 28 23 01 Camera BOM


REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS SECTION 00 11 19

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 11 19 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS

General Notice

The City of Cumming (Owner) is requesting Proposal for the construction of the following Project: City of Cumming - Security Improvements

Proposals for the construction of the Project will be received at the Cumming City Hall located at 100 Main Street, Cumming, GA 30040, until Wednesday, September 23, 2020 at 11:30am local time. Proposals will be opened and scored privately.

The Project requires the furnishing all materials, labor and equipment to perform the following Work:

Installation of security cameras at two locations: The Cumming Potable Water Production Facility (PWPF) and the Cumming Raw Water Intake (RW Intake).

The project also includes the removal of existing security cameras and associated equipment, installation of new security, new network video recorders, and associated equipment, and payment of appropriate license fees.

Owner anticipates that the Project’s estimated total proposal price to be approximately $225,000.00. The Project has an expected duration of 120 days.

Obtaining the Proposal Documents Information and Proposal Documents for the Project can be found at the following designated website: https://cecincga.com Proposal Documents may be downloaded from the designated website. Upon payment of $150.00 (non-refundable), Contractor shall be placed on the Plan Holders list and be eligible to submit a proposal on the project. Checks should be mailed to Civil Engineering Consultants, Inc. at 4994 Lower Roswell Road, Suite 17, Marietta, Georgia 30068. Hard copies of the Proposal Documents will not be available. The Issuing Office for the Proposal Documents is: Civil Engineering Consultants, Inc. Any questions should be directed to Gil Puffer, P.E. in writing at [email protected]. The last day for submission of questions shall be is seven (7) days prior to the date of the receipt of Proposals.

Pre-Proposal Conference A mandatory pre-proposal conference for the Project will be held on Wednesday, September 9, 2020 at 10:00am at Cumming PWPF, 935 Dahlonega Highway, Cumming, Georgia 30040. Proposals will not be accepted from Proposers that do not attend the mandatory pre-proposal conference.

Instructions to Proposers For all further requirements regarding Proposal submittal, qualifications, procedures, and contract award, refer to the Instructions to Proposers that are included in the Proposal Documents.


INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS SECTION 00 21 16

Page 1 of 12

SECTION 00 21 16 INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS

ARTICLE 1—DEFINED TERMS

1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Proposer have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Proposers have the meanings indicated below:

A. Issuing Office—The office from which the Proposal Documents are to be issued, and which registers plan holders.

ARTICLE 2—PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS

2.01 Proposer shall obtain a complete set of Proposal Requirements and proposed Contract Documents (together, the Proposal Documents). It is Proposer’s responsibility to determine that it is using a complete set of documents in the preparation of a Proposal. Proposer assumes sole responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete documents, by Proposer itself or by its prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers.

2.02 Proposal Documents are made available for the sole purpose of obtaining Proposals for completion of the Project and permission to download or distribution of the Proposal Documents does not confer a license or grant permission or authorization for any other use. Authorization to download documents, or other distribution, includes the right for plan holders to print documents solely for their use, and the use of their prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers, provided the plan holder pays all costs associated with printing or reproduction. Printed documents may not be re-sold under any circumstances.

2.03 Owner has established a Proposal Documents Website as indicated in the Request for Proposal. Owner requires that the Proposer register as a plan holder with the Issuing Office at such website and obtain a complete set of the Proposal Documents from such website. Proposers may rely that sets of Proposal Documents obtained from the Proposal Documents Website are complete unless an omission is blatant. Registered plan holders will receive Addenda issued by Owner.

2.04 Electronic Documents

A. When the Proposal Requirements indicate that electronic (digital) copies of the Proposal Documents are available, such documents will be made available to the Proposers as Electronic Documents in the manner specified.

1. Proposal Documents will be provided in Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format) (.pdf). It is the intent of the Engineer and Owner that such Electronic Documents are to be exactly representative of the paper copies of the documents. However, because the Owner and Engineer cannot totally control the transmission and receipt of Electronic Documents nor the Contractor’s means of reproduction of



Page 2 of 12

such documents, the Owner and Engineer cannot and do not guarantee that Electronic Documents and reproductions prepared from those versions are identical in every manner to the paper copies.

B. Unless otherwise stated in the Proposal Documents, the Proposer may use and rely upon complete sets of Electronic Documents of the Proposal Documents, described in Paragraph 2.06.A above. However, Proposer assumes all risks associated with differences arising from transmission/receipt of Electronic Documents versions of Proposal Documents and reproductions prepared from those versions and, further, assumes all risks, costs, and responsibility associated with use of the Electronic Documents versions to derive information that is not explicitly contained in printed paper versions of the documents, and for Proposer’s reliance upon such derived information.

ARTICLE 3—QUALIFICATIONS OF PROPOSERS

3.01 Proposer is to submit the following information with its Proposal to demonstrate Proposal’s qualifications to perform the Work:

1. The successful Proposer must be located within a 50-miles of the Cumming area. 2. The successful Proposer must be an Avigilon Certified Partner.

A. Written evidence of previous experience. 1. Minimum of three (3) projects in the last seven (7) years similar in size and using

similar equipment as proposed by proposed manufacturer.

B. Written evidence establishing that the Proposer is certified by the manufacturer in the installation of its equipment.

C. Written evidence establishing that the Proposer is licensed in Georgia to install Security Alarm systems.

D. To demonstrate current qualifications to perform the Work, each Proposer must submit the following with their Proposal:

1. Section 00 45 16 – Statement of Proposer’s Qualifications

2. Section 00 45 47 – Security and Immigration Compliance Act Certification

3.02 A Proposer’s failure to submit required qualification information indicated may disqualify Proposer from receiving an award of the Contract.

3.03 No requirement in this Article 3 to submit information will prejudice the right of Owner to seek additional pertinent information regarding Proposer’s qualifications.

ARTICLE 4—PRE-PROPOSAL CONFERENCE

4.01 A mandatory pre-proposal conference will be held at the time and location indicated in the Request for Proposal. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Proposals will not be accepted from Proposers who do not attend the conference. It is each Proposer’s responsibility to sign in at the pre-proposal conference to



Page 3 of 12

verify its participation. Proposers must sign in using the name of the organization that will be submitting a Proposal. A list of qualified Proposers that attended the pre-proposal conference and are eligible to submit a Proposal for this Project will be posted on the designated website.

4.02 Information presented at the pre-Proposal conference does not alter the Contract Documents. Owner will issue Addenda to make any changes to the Contract Documents that result from discussions at the pre-proposal conference. Information presented, and statements made at the pre-proposal conference will not be binding or legally effective unless incorporated in an Addendum.

4.03 All proposers will provide identification sufficient to prove they are an employee of the company they purport to represent.

ARTICLE 5—SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE; OWNER’S SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

5.01 Site and Other Areas

A. The Site is identified in the Proposal Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor. Any additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor.

5.02 Existing Site Conditions

A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions

1. The Supplementary Conditions identify the following regarding existing conditions at or adjacent to the Site:

a. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data.

b. Those drawings known to Owner of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data.

c. Reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site.

d. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

2. Owner will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to any Proposer on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Proposer is entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. Proposer is



Page 4 of 12

responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Proposer draws from any Technical Data or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.

3. If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default definition of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the General Conditions will apply.

5.03 Site Visit and Testing by Proposers

A. Proposer is required to visit the Site and conduct a thorough visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas. During the visit, the Proposer must not disturb any ongoing operations at the Site.

B. A Site visit is scheduled following the pre-proposal conference.

C. Proposers visiting the Site are required to arrange their own transportation to the Site.

D. Proposer is not required to conduct any subsurface testing, or exhaustive investigations of Site conditions.

E. On request, and to the extent Owner has control over the Site, and schedule permitting, the Owner will provide Proposer general access to the Site to conduct such additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Proposer deems necessary for preparing and submitting a successful Proposal. Owner will not have any obligation to grant such access if doing so is not practical because of existing operations, security or safety concerns, or restraints on Owner’s authority regarding the Site. Proposer is responsible for establishing access needed to reach specific selected test sites.

F. Proposer must comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation and location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions established by Owner or by property owners or other entities controlling the Site with respect to schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and applicable safety programs.

G. Proposer must fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies.

5.04 Owner’s Safety Program

A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program. If an Owner safety program exists, it will be noted in the Supplementary Conditions.

5.05 Other Work at the Site

A. Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to the Work contemplated by these Proposal Documents. If Owner is party to a written contract for such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each



Page 5 of 12

Proposer access to examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other confidential matters), if any.

ARTICLE 6—PROPOSER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS

6.01 Express Representations and Certifications in Proposal Form, Agreement

A. The Proposal Form that each Proposer will submit contains express representations regarding the Proposer’s examination of Project documentation, Site visit, and preparation of the Proposal, and certifications regarding lack of collusion or fraud in connection with the Proposal. Proposer should review these representations and certifications, and assure that Proposer can make the representations and certifications in good faith, before executing and submitting its Proposal.

B. If Proposer is awarded the Contract, Proposer (as Contractor) will make similar express representations and certifications when it executes the Agreement.

ARTICLE 7—INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

7.01 Owner on its own initiative may issue Addenda to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the Proposal Documents.

7.02 Proposer shall submit all questions about the meaning or intent of the Proposal Documents to Engineer in writing. Contact information and submittal procedures for such questions are as follows:

A. Any questions should be directed to Gil Puffer, P.E. in writing [email protected]. The last day for submission of questions shall seven (7) days prior to the date of the receipt of Proposals.

7.03 Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all registered plan holders. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of Proposals may not be answered.

7.04 Only responses set forth in an Addendum will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. Responses to questions are not part of the Contract Documents unless set forth in an Addendum that expressly modifies or supplements the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 8—PROPOSAL SECURITY

8.01 Each PROPOSAL must be accompanied by a PROPOSAL Bond or check payable to the OWNER for ten percent of the total amount of the PROPOSAL. As soon as the PROPOSAL prices have been compared, the OWNER will return the Checks or PROPOSAL Bonds of all except the three (3) lowest responsible PROPOSERS. When the Agreement is executed, the Bonds of the two (2) remaining unsuccessful PROPOSERS will be returned. If no Award has been made within 120 days after the opening of PROPOSALS, the PROPOSERS may request return of their Checks or PROPOSAL Bonds



Page 6 of 12

if they have not been notified of the acceptance of his/her or their PROPOSAL. The PROPOSAL Bond of the successful PROPOSER will be retained until the Performance Bond has been executed and approved, after which, it will be returned. A certified check may be used in lieu of a PROPOSAL Bond. The PROPOSAL Bond shall be secured by a guaranty or a surety company, listed in the latest issue of U.S. Treasury Circular 570, licensed to do business in the State of Georgia and by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions. Such Proposal bond will be issued in the form included in the Proposal Documents.

8.02 The Proposal security of the apparent Successful Proposer will be retained until Owner awards the contract to such Proposer, and such Proposer has executed the Contract, furnished the required Contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Proposal security will be released. If the Successful Proposer fails to execute and deliver the Contract and furnish the required Contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, Owner may consider Proposer to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Proposal security of that Proposer will be forfeited, in whole in the case of a penal sum Proposal bond, and to the extent of Owner’s damages in the case of a damages-form bond. Such forfeiture will be Owner’s exclusive remedy if Proposer defaults.

8.03 The Proposal security of other Proposers that Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of 7 days after the Effective Date of the Contract or 61 days after the Proposal opening, whereupon Proposal security furnished by such Proposers will be released.

8.04 Proposal security of other Proposers that Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving the award will be released within 7 days after the Proposal opening.

ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT TIMES

9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be (a) substantially completed and (b) ready for final payment, and (c) Milestones (if any) are to be achieved, are set forth in the Agreement.

9.02 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 10—SUBSTITUTE AND “OR EQUAL” ITEMS

10.01 The Contract for the Work, as awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or described in the Proposal Documents without consideration during the proposal and Contract award process of possible substitute or “or-equal” items. In cases in which the Contract allows the Contractor to request that Engineer authorize the use of a substitute or “or-equal” item of material or equipment, application for such acceptance may



Page 7 of 12

not be made to and will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Contract.

10.02 All prices that Proposer sets forth in its Proposal will be based on the presumption that the Contractor will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Proposal Documents, as supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post-Proposal approvals of “or-equal” or substitution requests are made at Proposer’s sole risk.

ARTICLE 11—SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS

11.01 A Proposer must be prepared to retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of the Work if required to do so by the Proposal Documents or in the Specifications. If a prospective Proposer objects to retaining any such Subcontractor or Supplier and the concern is not relieved by an Addendum, then the prospective Proposer should refrain from submitting a Proposal.

11.02 The apparent Successful Proposer, and any other Proposer so requested, must submit to Owner a list of the Subcontractors or Suppliers proposed for the following portions of the Work within five days after Proposal opening:

A. Not Applicable.

11.03 If requested by Owner, such list must be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor or Supplier. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor or Supplier, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Proposer to submit an acceptable substitute, in which case apparent Successful Proposer will submit a substitute, Proposer’s Proposal price will be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider such price adjustment in evaluating Proposal and making the Contract award.

11.04 If apparent Successful Proposer declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest Proposer that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors and Suppliers. Declining to make requested substitutions will constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Proposal security of any Proposer. Any Subcontractor or Supplier, so listed and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to subsequent revocation of such acceptance as provided in Paragraph 7.07 of the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 12—PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL

12.01 The Proposal Form is included with the Proposal Documents.

A. All blanks on the Proposal Form must be completed in ink and the Proposal Form signed in ink. Erasures or alterations must be initialed in ink by the person signing the Proposal Form. A Proposal price must be indicated for each section, Proposal item, alternate, adjustment unit price item, and unit price item listed therein.



Page 8 of 12

B. If the Proposal Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is optional, and Proposer elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then Proposer may enter the words “No Prposal” or “Not Applicable.”

12.02 If Proposer has obtained the Proposal Documents as Electronic Documents, then Proposer shall prepare its Proposal on a paper copy of the Proposal Form printed from the Electronic Documents version of the Proposal Documents. The printed copy of the Proposal Form must be clearly legible, printed on 8½ inch by 11-inch paper and as closely identical in appearance to the Electronic Document version of the Proposal Form as may be practical. The Owner reserves the right to accept Proposal Forms which nominally vary in appearance from the original paper version of the Proposal Form, providing that all required information and submittals are included with the Proposal.

12.03 A Proposal by a corporation must be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown.

12.04 A Proposal by a partnership must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The official address of the partnership must be shown.

12.05 A Proposal by a limited liability company must be executed in the name of the firm by a member or other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm must be shown.

12.06 A Proposal by an individual must show the Proposer’s name and official address.

12.07 A Proposal by a joint venture must be executed by an authorized representative of each joint venturer in the manner indicated on the Proposal Form. The joint venture must have been formally established prior to submittal of a Proposal, and the official address of the joint venture must be shown.

12.08 All names must be printed in ink below the signatures.

12.09 The Proposal must contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which must be filled in on the Proposal Form.

12.10 Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Proposal must be shown.

12.11 The Proposal must contain evidence of Proposer’s authority to do business in the state where the Project is located, or Proposer must certify in writing that it will obtain such authority within the time for acceptance of Proposals and attach such certification to the Proposal.

12.12 If Proposer is required to be licensed to submit a Proposal or perform the Work in the state where the Project is located, the Proposal must contain evidence of Proposer’s licensure, or Proposer must certify in writing that it will obtain such licensure within the time for



Page 9 of 12

acceptance of Proposals and attach such certification to the Proposal. Proposer’s state contractor license number, if any, must also be shown on the Proposal Form.

ARTICLE 13—BASIS OF COST PROPOSAL

13.01 Unit Price

A. Proposers must submit a Proposal on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the unit price section of the Proposal Form.

B. The “Proposal Price” (sometimes referred to as the extended price) for each unit price Proposal item will be the product of the “Estimated Quantity”, which Owner or its representative has set forth in the Proposal Form, for the item and the corresponding “Proposal Unit Price” offered by the Proposer. The total of all unit price Proposal items will be the sum of these “Proposal Prices”; such total will be used by Owner for Proposal comparison purposes. The final quantities and Contract Price will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions.

C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.

ARTICLE 14—SUBMITTAL OF PROPOSAL

14.01 Each proposal will consist of a TECHNICAL proposal and a COST proposal. It is anticipated that a contract for the described services will be entered into with the firm that, in the opinion of the OWNER, offers the most favorable combination of qualifications and pricing. This process involves the concurrent review and evaluation of the TECHNICAL and COST proposals. The selection committee considers the pricing information merely as one of the selection criteria and not the final determinant. The OWNER may request additional information and/or may conduct interviews of responding firms.

14.02 FOUR COPIES of the TECHNICAL PROPOSAL and ONE copy of the COST PROPOSAL shall be submitted in separate sealed envelopes.

14.03 A Proposal must be received no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in the Request for Proposal or invitation to proposal and must be enclosed in a plainly marked package with the Project title, and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Proposal is submitted, the name and address of Proposer, and must be accompanied by the Proposal security and other required documents. If a Proposal is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Proposal must be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the notation “PROPOSAL ENCLOSED.” A mailed Proposal must be addressed to the location designated in the Request for Proposal.

14.04 Proposals received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of proposals, or not submitted at the correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the Proposer unopened.



Page 10 of 12

14.05 A conditional or qualified PROPOSAL will not be accepted.

ARTICLE 15—MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSAL

15.01 An unopened Proposal may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner that a Proposal must be executed and delivered to the place where Proposals are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Proposals. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Proposal will be returned to the Proposer.

15.02 If a Proposer wishes to modify its Proposal prior to Proposal opening, Proposer must withdraw its initial Proposal in the manner specified in Paragraph 15.01 and submit a new Proposal prior to the date and time for the opening of Proposals.

15.03 If within 24 hours after Proposals are opened any Proposer files a duly signed written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Proposal, the Proposer may withdraw its Proposal, and the Proposal security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is re-proposed, the Proposer will be disqualified from further Proposing on the Work.

ARTICLE 16—OPENING OF PROPOSALS

16.01 Proposals will be opened privately by the Evaluation Committee. The scoring results will be posted at the designated website prior to the next regularly scheduled City Commission Meeting.

ARTICLE 17—PROPOSALS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE

17.01 All Proposals will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Proposal Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Proposal and return the Proposal security prior to the end of this period.

ARTICLE 18—EVALUATION OF PROPOSALS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT

18.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, including without limitation, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Proposals. Owner also reserves the right to waive all minor Proposal informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work.

18.02 Owner will reject the Proposal of any Proposer that Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible.

18.03 If Proposer purports to add terms or conditions to its Proposal, takes exception to any provision of the Proposing Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of the Proposal, whether in the Proposal itself or in a separate



Page 11 of 12

communication to Owner or Engineer, then Owner will reject the Proposal as nonresponsive.

18.04 If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award will be to the responsible Proposer with the highest scoring Proposal in accordance with the following paragraph.

18.05 Evaluation of Proposals

A. The evaluation is based on a total maximum score of 100, with the following point breakdown per category.

1. TECHNICAL PROPOSAL – 20 points

2. COST PROPOSAL – 80 points

B. In evaluating Proposals, A maximum of 80 points will be awarded to the PROPOSER with the lowest price. All other proposers will receive lesser points based on the percentage difference from the lowest price according to the following sample calculation.

Proposer A has a cost proposal of $3,000,000 and receives 80 points

Proposer B has a cost proposal of $3,200,000 and receives 75 points based on the following calculation:

80 – [80 x ($3,200,000 - $3,000,000)/$3,000,000] = 75 points

C. Owner will consider whether the Proposals comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Proposal Form or prior to the Notice of Award.

D. Proposal prices will be compared after adjusting for differences in time of Substantial Completion.

18.06 In evaluating whether a Proposer is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Proposer and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be submitted as provided in the Proposal Documents.

18.07 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Proposers and any proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers.

18.08 PROPOSERS should refrain from contacting any of the selection committee members during the evaluation and selection process.

ARTICLE 19—BONDS AND INSURANCE

19.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds, other required bonds (if any), and insurance. When the Successful Proposal delivers the executed



Page 12 of 12

Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation.

19.02 Article 8, Proposal Security, of these Instructions, addresses any requirements for providing proposal bonds as part of the proposing process.

ARTICLE 20—SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

20.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Proposer, it will be accompanied by the unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents as identified in the Agreement. Within 10 days thereafter, Successful Proposer must execute and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and any bonds and insurance documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents to Owner. Within 10 days thereafter, Owner will deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful Proposer, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract Documents as stated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.


PROPOSAL FORM SECTION 00 42 13

Page 1 of 6

SECTION 00 42 13 PROPOSAL FORM

The terms used in this Proposal with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to Proposers, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.

ARTICLE 1—OWNER AND PROPOSER

1.01 This Proposal is submitted to: City of Cumming, 100 Main Street

Cumming, GA 30040

1.02 The undersigned Proposer proposes and agrees, if this Proposal is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Proposal Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Proposal Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Proposal and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Proposal Documents.

ARTICLE 2—ATTACHMENTS TO THIS PROPOSAL

2.01 The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Proposal:

A. Required Proposal security;

B. Evidence of authority to do business in the state of the Project; or a written covenant to obtain such authority within the time for acceptance of Proposals;

C. Required Proposer Qualification Statement with supporting data; and

D. Other required documents.

1. Section 00 45 16 – Statement of Proposer’s Qualifications

2. Section 00 45 47 – Security and Immigration Compliance Act Certification

ARTICLE 3—BASIS OF PROPOSAL—LUMP SUM PROPOSAL

3.01 Cost Proposal

A. Proposer will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s):



Page 2 of 6

PROPOSAL SCHEDULE

Item Description Unit Qty. Unit Price Total Price

SECURITY INSTALLATION

1. Security Installation @ Cumming PWDF LS 1 $_____________ $_____________

2. Security Installation @ Cumming RW Intake LS 1 $_____________ $_____________

GENERAL INSTALLATION

3. Owner Contingency LS 1 $ 50,000.00 $ 50,000.00

TOTAL AMOUNT PROPOSAL (ITEMS 1 THROUGH 3, INCLUSIVE) $________________________

B. Proposer acknowledges that:

1. each Proposal Lump Sum Price includes an amount considered by Proposer to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item, and

2. estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Proposals, and final payment for all Lump Sum Price Work will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 4—TIME OF COMPLETION

4.01 Proposer agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.

4.02 Proposer accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages.



Page 3 of 6

ARTICLE 5—PROPOSALDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: ACCEPTANCE PERIOD, INSTRUCTIONS, AND RECEIPT OF ADDENDA

5.01 Proposal Acceptance Period

A. This Proposal will remain subject to acceptance for 120 days after the Proposal opening, or for such longer period of time that Proposer may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.

5.02 Instructions to Proposers

A. Proposer accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Proposers, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Proposal security.

5.03 Receipt of Addenda

A. Proposer hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda:

Addendum Number Addendum Date

ARTICLE 6—PROPOSALDER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS

6.01 Proposer’s Representations

A. In submitting this Proposal, Proposer represents the following:

1. Proposer has examined and carefully studied the Proposal Documents, including Addenda.

2. Proposer has visited the Site, conducted a thorough visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

3. Proposer is familiar with all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

4. Proposer has carefully studied the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and the drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to the Technical Data in such reports and drawings.

5. Proposer has carefully studied the reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.



Page 4 of 6

6. Proposer has considered the information known to Proposer itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Proposal Documents; and the Technical Data identified in the Supplementary Conditions or by definition, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and Technical Data on (a) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (b) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Proposer, if selected as Contractor; and (c) Proposer’s (Contractor’s) safety precautions and programs.

7. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, Proposer agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract.

8. Proposer is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Proposal Documents.

9. Proposer has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Proposer has discovered in the Proposal Documents, and of discrepancies between Site conditions and the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.

10. The Proposal Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.

11. The submission of this Proposal constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Proposer that without exception the Proposal and all prices in the Proposal are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Proposal Documents.

6.02 Proposer’s Certifications

A. The Proposer certifies the following:

1. This Proposal is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation.

2. Proposer has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Proposer to submit a false or sham Proposal.

3. Proposer has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from Proposing.

4. Proposer has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 8.02.A:



Page 5 of 6

a. Corrupt practice means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the Proposing process.

b. Fraudulent practice means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the Proposing process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Proposal prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition.

c. Collusive practice means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Proposers, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Proposal prices at artificial, non-competitive levels.

d. Coercive practice means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the Proposing process or affect the execution of the Contract.



Page 6 of 6

PROPOSER hereby submits this Proposal as set forth above:

Proposer:

(typed or printed name of organization)

By: (individual’s signature)

Name: (typed or printed)

Title: (typed or printed)

Date: (typed or printed)

If Proposer is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.

Attest: (individual’s signature)



Date: (typed or printed)

Address for giving notices:

Proposer’s Contact:



Phone:

Email:

Address: Proposer’s Utility Contractor License No.: applicable)


PROPOSAL BOND SECTION 00 43 13

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 00 43 13 PROPOSAL BOND

Proposer Surety Name: Name:

Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business):

Owner Proposal

Name: The City of Cumming Project (name and location):

Address (principal place of business): Cumming Security Improvements Cumming, GA 100 Main Street

Cumming, GA 30040

Proposal Due Date:

Bond

Bond Amount:

Date of Bond:

Surety and Proposer, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this Proposal Bond, do each cause this Proposal Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. Proposal Surety

(Full formal name of Proposer) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)

By: By: (Signature) (Signature) (Attach Power of Attorney)

Name: Name: (Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)

Title: Title:

Attest: Attest: (Signature) (Signature)


Title:

Title:

Notes: (1) Note: Addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. (2) Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.


PROPOSAL BOND SECTION 00 43 13

Page 2 of 2

1. Proposer and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Proposer any difference between the total amount of Proposer’s Proposal and the total amount of the Proposal of the next lowest, responsible Proposer that submitted a responsive Proposal, as determined by Owner, for the work required by the Contract Documents, provided that:

1.1. If there is no such next Proposer, and Owner does not abandon the Project, then Proposer and Surety shall pay to Owner the bond amount set forth on the face of this Bond, and

1.2. In no event will Proposer’s and Surety’s obligation hereunder exceed the bond amount set forth on the face of this Bond.

1.3. Recovery under the terms of this Bond will be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Proposer.

2. Default of Proposer occurs upon the failure of Proposer to deliver within the time required by the Proposal Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Proposal Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Proposal Documents.

3. This obligation will be null and void if:

3.1. Owner accepts Proposer’s Proposal and Proposer delivers within the time required by the Proposal Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Proposal Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Proposal Documents, or

3.2. All Proposals are rejected by Owner, or

3.3. Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Proposer within the time specified in the Proposal Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Proposer and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof).

4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Proposer and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Proposer and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.

5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Proposer, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions will not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from Proposal due date without Surety’s written consent.

6. No suit or action will be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Proposer and Surety, and in no case later than one year after the Proposal due date.

7. Any suit or action under this Bond must be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located.

8. Notices required hereunder must be in writing and sent to Proposer and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Postal Service registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and will be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned.

9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.

10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond will be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute governs and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith continues in full force and effect.

11. The term “Proposal” as used herein includes a Proposal, offer, or proposal as applicable.

CITY OF CUMMING – SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS 08/26/2020

STATEMENT OF PROPOSER’S QUALIFICATIONS SECTION 00 45 16

Page 1 of 12

SECTION 00 45 16 STATEMENT OF PROPOSER’S QUALIFICATIONS

ARTICLE 1—GENERAL INFORMATION

1.01 Provide contact information for the Business: (Proposer must be located within a 50-miles of the Cumming area).

Legal Name of Business:

Corporate Office

Name: Phone number:

Title: Email address:

Business address of corporate office:

Local Office

Name: Phone number:

Title: Email address:

Business address of local office:

1.02 Provide information on the Business’s organizational structure:

Form of Business: ☐ Sole Proprietorship ☐ Partnership ☐ Corporation

☐ Limited Liability Company ☐ Joint Venture comprised of the following companies:

1.

2.

3.

Provide a separate Qualification Statement for each Joint Venturer.

Date Business was formed: State in which Business was formed:

Is this Business authorized to operate in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No ☐ Pending

1.03 Identify all businesses that own Business in whole or in part (25% or greater), or that are wholly or partly (25% or greater) owned by Business:



Page 2 of 12

Name of business: Affiliation:

Address:


Address:


Address:

1.04 Provide information regarding the Business’s officers, partners, and limits of authority.

Name: Title:

Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $

Name: Title:


Name: Title:


Name: Title:

ARTICLE 2—LICENSING

2.01 Provide information regarding licensure for Business: (Proposer must be an Avigilon Certified Partner).

Name of License:

Licensing Agency:

License No: Expiration Date:

Name of License:

Licensing Agency:

License No: Expiration Date:

ARTICLE 3—CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE

3.01 Provide information that will identify the overall size and capacity of the Business.

Average number of current full-time employees:

Estimate of revenue for the current year:

Estimate of revenue for the previous year:



Page 3 of 12

3.02 Provide information regarding the Business’s previous contracting experience.

Years of experience with projects like the proposed project:

As a general contractor: As a joint venturer:

Has Business, or a predecessor in interest, or an affiliate identified in Paragraph 1.03:

Been disqualified as a Proposer by any local, state, or federal agency within the last 5 years? ☐ Yes ☐ No Been barred from contracting by any local, state, or federal agency within the last 5 years? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Been released from a proposal in the past 5 years? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Defaulted on a project or failed to complete any contract awarded to it? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents or in a change order? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Been a party to any currently pending litigation or arbitration? ☐ Yes ☐ No

Provide full details in a separate attachment if the response to any of these questions is Yes.

3.03 List all projects currently under contract in Schedule A and provide indicated information.

3.04 List a minimum of three and a maximum of six projects completed in the last 5 years in Schedule B and provide indicated information to demonstrate the Business’s experience with projects similar in type and cost of construction.

3.05 In Schedule C, provide information on key individuals whom Business intends to assign to the Project. Provide resumes for those individuals included in Schedule C. Key individuals include the Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Quality Manager, and Safety Manager. Resumes may be provided for Business’s key leaders as well.

ARTICLE 4—REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS

4.01 Provide the following information with the Statement of Qualifications:

A. If Business is a Joint Venture, separate Qualifications Statements for each Joint Venturer, as required in Paragraph 1.02.

B. Diverse Business Certifications if required by Paragraph 2.01.

C. Attachments providing additional information as required by Paragraph 3.02.

D. Schedule A (Current Projects) as required by Paragraph 3.03.

E. Schedule B (Previous Experience with Similar Projects) as required by Paragraph 3.04.

F. Schedule C (Key Individuals) and resumes for the key individuals listed, as required by Paragraph 3.05.

G. Additional items as pertinent.



Page 4 of 12

This Statement of Qualifications is offered by:

Business:

(typed or printed name of organization)

By: (individual’s signature)



Date: (date signed)

(If Business is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest: (individual’s signature)


Title:

(typed or printed)

Mailing Address for Notices:

Designated Representative:



Address:

Phone:

Email:



Page 5 of 12

Schedule A—Current Projects

Name of Organization

Project Owner Project Name

General Description of Project

Project Cost Date Project Completed

Key Project Personnel

Project Manager Project Superintendent

Name

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)

Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email

Owner

Designer

Construction Manager







Name




Page 6 of 12


Owner

Designer

Construction M







Name



Owner

Designer

Construction Manager



Page 7 of 12

Schedule B—Previous Experience with Similar Projects







Name

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email

Owner

Designer Construction Manager



Page 8 of 12







Name


Owner








Name


Owner




Page 9 of 12







Name


Owner








Name


Owner




Page 10 of 12







Name


Owner




Page 11 of 12

Schedule C—Key Individuals

Project Manager Name of individual Years of experience as project manager Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as project manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of assignment Percent of time used for

this projectEstimated project completion date

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference) Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Candidate’s role on project

Candidate’s role on project

Project Superintendent Name of individual Years of experience as project superintendent Years of experience with this organization Number of similar projects as project superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of assignment Percent of time used for

this projectEstimated project completion date

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference) Name Name Title/Position Title/Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone Email Email Project Project Candidate’s role on project

Candidate’s role on project



Page 12 of 12

I, , certify that I am of the Proposer, and that the answers to the foregoing questions and statements contained therein are true and correct.

PROPOSER:

By:

(name signed)

(name printed or typed)

Title:

Date:

Subscribed and sworn to me this day of , 20 ___.

NOTARY PUBLIC:

(name signed)

(name printed or typed)

Commission Expires:

(Date)

(SEAL)


SECURITY AND IMMIGRATION COMPLIANCE ACT CERTIFICATION SECTION 00 45 47

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 45 47 SECURITY AND IMMIGRATION COMPLIANCE ACT CERTIFICATION

Pursuant to the Georgia Security and Immigration Compliance Act of 2006, Contractor understands and agrees that compliance with the requirements of OCGA 13-10-91 and Georgia Department of Labor Rule 300-10-1 et. seq. are conditions of Agreement. Contractor further agrees that such compliance shall be attested through execution of Contractor Affidavit and Agreement required by Georgia Department of Labor Rule 300-10-1-.07, or a substantially similar contractor affidavit. Contractor’s fully executed affidavit is attached and is incorporated into this Agreement by reference herein.

By initialing in the appropriate line below, Contractor certifies that the following employee number category as identified in OCGA 13-10-91 is applicable to Contractor:

1. 500 or more employees; 2. 100 or more employees; 3. Fewer than 100 employees.

Contractor understands and agrees that, in the event Contractor employs or contracts with Subcontractor in connection with this Agreement, Contractor shall:

1. Secure from each Subcontractor an indication of the employee-number category as identified in OCGA 13-10-91; and

2. Secure from each Subcontractor an attestation of Subcontractor’s compliance with OCGA 13-10-91 and Georgia Department of Labor Rule 300-10-1-.02 by causing each Subcontractor to execute the attached Subcontractor Affidavit required by Georgia Department of Labor Rule 300-10-1-.08, or a substantially similar subcontractor affidavit. Contractor further understands and agrees that Contractor shall require the executed Subcontractor Affidavit to become a part of the agreement between Contractor and each Subcontractor. Contractor agrees to maintain records of each Subcontractor attestation required hereunder for inspection by Owner.

BY: Authorized Officer or Agent Date

Title of Authorized Officer or Agent if Contractor

Printed Name of Authorized Officer or Agent

Subscribed and Sworn Before Me on this _______ day of _________________________, 20____

Notary Public My Commission Expires: _______________________________


NOTICE OF AWARD SECTION 00 51 00

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 51 00

NOTICE OF AWARD

Date of Issuance:

Owner: CITY OF CUMMING

Engineer: CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.

Project: CITY OF CUMMING-SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS

Contractor:

Contractor’s Address:

You are notified that Owner has accepted your Proposal dated for the above Contract, and that you are the Successful Proposer and are awarded a Contract for:

City of Cumming – Security Improvements The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is $ . Contract Price is subject to adjustment based on the provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to those governing changes, Unit Price Work, and Work performed on a cost-plus-fee basis, as applicable.

You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this Notice of Award:

1. Deliver with the signed Agreement(s) the Contract security (such as required performance and payment bonds) and insurance documentation, as specified in the Instructions to Proposers and in the General Conditions, Articles 2 and 6.

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Proposal security forfeited.

ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE

Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowledged by


By (signature):

Name (printed): PHIL HIGGINS

Title: CITY ADMINISTRATOR

Contractor:

By (signature):

Name (printed):

Title:

Copy: Civil Engineering Consultants, Inc.


STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT SECTION 00 52 13

Page 1 of 7

SECTION 00 52 13 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT

BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF STIPULATED PRICE

This Agreement is by and between CITY OF CUMMING, GEORGIA (“Owner”) and [name of contracting entity] (“Contractor”).

Terms used in this Agreement have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions.

Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1—WORK

1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: Installation of security cameras at two locations: the Cumming Potable Water Production Facility (PWPF) and the Cumming Raw Water Intake (RW Intake).

ARTICLE 2—THE PROJECT

2.01 The Project requires the furnishing all materials, labor and equipment to perform the following:

Installation of security cameras at two locations: The Cumming Potable Water Production Facility (PWPF) and the Cumming Raw Water Intake (RW Intake). Project also includes the removal of existing security cameras and associated equipment, installation of new security, new network video recorders, and associated equipment, and payment of appropriate license fees.

ARTICLE 3-ENGINEER

3.01 The Owner has retained CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, Inc. (“Engineer”) to act as Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities of Engineer, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract.

ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT TIMES

4.01 Time is of the Essence

A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.

4.02 Contract Times: Days

A. The Work will be substantially complete within 120 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within 150 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.

4.05 Liquidated Damages

A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed and Milestones not achieved within the Contract Times, as duly modified. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration proceeding, the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time.



Page 2 of 7

Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty):

1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $100 for each day that expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified above for Substantial Completion, until the Work is substantially complete.

2. Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Times (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final payment, Contractor shall pay Owner $50 for each day that expires after such time until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.

3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Milestones, Substantial Completion, and final completion are not additive, and will not be imposed concurrently.

B. If Owner recovers liquidated damages for a delay in completion by Contractor, then such liquidated damages are Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy for such delay, and Owner is precluded from recovering any other damages, whether actual, direct, excess, or consequential, for such delay, except for special damages (if any) specified in this Agreement.

ARTICLE 5—CONTRACT PRICE

5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the amounts that follow, subject to adjustment under the Contract:

A. For all Lump Sum Price Work, an amount equal to the sum of the extended prices (established for each Lump Sum item of Work by multiplying the unit price times the actual quantity of that item).

The extended prices for Lump Sum Work set forth as of the Effective Date of the Contract are based on estimated quantities. As provided in Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions, estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and determinations of actual quantities and classifications are to be made by Engineer.

ARTICLE 6—PAYMENT PROCEDURES

6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments

A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions.

6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage

A. Owner shall make progress payments on the basis of Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the last day of each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below, provided that such Applications for Payment have been submitted in a timely manner and otherwise meet the requirements of the Contract. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided elsewhere in the Contract.

1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously



Page 3 of 7

made and less such amounts as Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract.

a. 90 percent of the value of the Work completed (with the balance being retainage).

1) If 50 percent or more of the Work has been completed, as determined by Engineer, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, then as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, there will be no additional retainage; and

b. 90 percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the balance being retainage).

B. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor to 95 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts set off by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 15.01.E of the General Conditions, and less 200 percent of Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.

6.03 Final Payment

A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions.

6.04 Consent of Surety

A. Owner will not make final payment, or return or release retainage at Substantial Completion or any other time, unless Contractor submits written consent of the surety to such payment, return, or release.

6.05 Interest

A. All amounts not paid when due will bear interest at the rate of 0.25 percent per month.

ARTICLE 7—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

7.01 Contents

A. The Contract Documents consist of all of the following:

1. This Agreement.

2. Bonds:

a. Performance bond (together with power of attorney).

b. Payment bond (together with power of attorney).

3. General Conditions.

4. Supplementary Conditions.

5. Specifications dated Month xx, 2020, bearing the title City of Cumming – Security Improvements and as listed in table of contents thereof.

6. Drawings (not attached but incorporated by reference) consisting of [number] sheets with each sheet bearing the following general title: City of Cumming – Security Improvements.

7. Addenda (numbers [number] to [number], inclusive).



Page 4 of 7

8. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and are not attached hereto:

a. Notice to Proceed.

b. Change Order Form.

d. Certificate of Owner's Attorney.

B. The Contract Documents listed in Paragraph 7.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above).

C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 7.

D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in the Contract.

ARTICLE 8—REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS, AND STIPULATIONS

8.01 Contractor’s Representations

A. In order to induce Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor makes the following representations:

1. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents, including Addenda.

2. Contractor has visited the Site, conducted a thorough visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

3. Contractor is familiar with all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

4. Contractor has carefully studied the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and the drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to the Technical Data in such reports and drawings.

5. Contractor has carefully studied the reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.

6. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Technical Data identified in the Supplementary Conditions or by definition, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and Technical Data on (a) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (b) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and (c) Contractor’s safety precautions and programs.

7. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract.



Page 5 of 7

8. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others atthe Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.

9. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, ordiscrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and ofdiscrepancies between Site conditions and the Contract Documents, and the writtenresolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.

10. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding ofall terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.

11. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation byContractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised uponperforming and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents.

8.02 Contractor’s Certifications

A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 8.02:

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of valuelikely to influence the action of a public official in the proposal process or in the Contractexecution;

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the propoal process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Proposal or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;

3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Proposers, withor without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Proposal prices atartificial, non-competitive levels; and

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, personsor their property to influence their participation in the proposal process or affect theexecution of the Contract.

8.03 Standard General Conditions

A. Owner stipulates that if the General Conditions that are made a part of this Contract are EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions for the Construction Contract (2018), published by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee, and if Owner is the party that has furnished said General Conditions, then Owner has plainly shown all modifications to the standard wording of such published document to the Contractor, through a process such as highlighting or “track changes” (redline/strikeout), or in the Supplementary Conditions.

ARTICLE 9—MISCELLANEOUS

9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions.

9.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written



Page 6 of 7

consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.

9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.



Page 7 of 7

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement.

This Agreement will be effective on [indicate date on which Contract becomes effective] (which is the Effective Date of the Contract).

Owner: Contractor:

CITY OF CUMMING, GA (typed or printed name of organization) (typed or printed name of organization)

By: By: (individual’s signature) (individual’s signature)

Date: Date: (date signed) (date signed)

Name: Phil Higgins Name: (typed or printed) (typed or printed)

Title: City Administrator Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed)

(If [Type of Entity] is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest: Attest: (individual’s signature) (individual’s signature)

Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed)

Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

City of Cumming

100 Main Street

Cumming, GA 30040 Designated Representative: Designated Representative:

Name: Name: (typed or printed) (typed or printed)

Title: Title: (typed or printed) (typed or printed)

Address: Address:

Phone: Phone:

Email: Email:(If [Type of Entity] is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If [Type of Entity] is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of this Agreement.)

License No.:(where applicable)

State:


NOTICE TO PROCEED SECTION 00 55 00

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 55 00 NOTICE TO PROCEED


Engineer: CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC.

Contractor:

Project: CITY OF CUMMING-SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS

Effective Date of Contract:

You are notified that Owner has accepted your Proposal dated for the above Contract, and that you are the Successful Proposer and are awarded a Contract for:

City of Cumming – Security Improvements The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is $ . Contract Price is subject to adjustment based on the provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to those governing changes, Unit Price Work, and Work performed on a cost-plus-fee basis, as applicable.

You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this Notice of Award:

1. Deliver with the signed Agreement(s) the Contract security (such as required performance and payment bonds) and insurance documentation, as specified in the Instructions to Proposers and in the General Conditions, Articles 2 and 6.

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Proposal security forfeited.

ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE

Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowledged by


By (signature):

Name (printed): PHIL HIGGINS

Title: CITY ADMINISTRATOR

Contractor:

By (signature):

Name (printed):

Title:

Copy: Civil Engineering Consultants, Inc.


PERFORMANCE BOND SECTION 00 61 14

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 00 61 14 PERFORMANCE BOND

Contractor Surety

Name: Name:


Owner Contract

Name: The City of Cumming Description (name and location):

Mailing address (principal place of business): City of Cumming – Security Improvements Cumming, GA 100 Main Street

Cumming, Georgia 30040 Contract Price:


Bond

Bond Amount:

Date of Bond: (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract)

Modifications to this Bond form: ☒ None ☐ See Paragraph 16

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this Performance Bond, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

Contractor as Principal Surety

(Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)

By: By: (Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney)


Title: Title:


Name: Name:(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)

Title: Title:Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable.



Page 2 of 4

The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

1. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have noobligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided inParagraph 3.

2. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bondwill arise after:

2.1. The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is consideringdeclaring a Contractor Default. Such notice may indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 will be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement does not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default;

2.2. The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and

2.3. The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract.

3. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 does notconstitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release theSurety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.

4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at theSurety’s expense take one of the following actions:

4.1. Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete theConstruction Contract;

4.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;

4.3. Obtain proposals or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owners concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or

4.4. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:

5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or



Page 3 of 4

5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial.

5. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment, or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice, the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.

6. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner will not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety will not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for:

6.1. the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

6.2. additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and

6.3. liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.

8. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price will not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action will accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.

9. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

10. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond must be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and must be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable.

11. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor must be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears.

12. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted therefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

13. Definitions

13.1. Balance of the Contract Price—The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for



Page 4 of 4

the Contractor for any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.

13.2. Construction Contract—The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

13.3. Contractor Default—Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.

13.4. Owner Default—Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

13.5. Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

14. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor.


PAYMENT BOND SECTION 00 61 15

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 00 61 15 PAYMENT BOND

Contractor Surety

Name: Name:


Owner Contract

Name: City of Cumming Description (name and location):

Mailing address (principal place of business): City of Cumming – Security Improvements Cumming, GA 100 Main Street

Cumming, Georgia 30040 Contract Price:


Bond

Bond Amount:

Date of Bond: (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract)

Modifications to this Bond form: ☒ None ☐ See Paragraph 18 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth in this Payment Bond, do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. Contractor as Principal Surety

(Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)

By: By: (Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney)


Title: Title:


Name: Name:(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)

Title: Title:Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable.



Page 2 of 4

1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.

2. If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this Bond will arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.

4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit.

5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond will arise after the following:

5.1. Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor

5.1.1. have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and

5.1.2. have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).

5.2. Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).

6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.

7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:

7.1. Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and

7.2. Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

7.3. The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 will not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.



Page 3 of 4

8. The Surety’s total obligation will not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond will be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.

9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract will be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfying obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.

10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

12. No suit or action will be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable.

13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor must be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, will be sufficient compliance as of the date received.

14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted here from and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

16. Definitions

16.1. Claim—A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:

16.1.1. The name of the Claimant;

16.1.2. The name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished;

16.1.3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

16.1.4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished;



Page 4 of 4

16.1.5. The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

16.1.6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim;

16.1.7. The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and

16.1.8. The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim.

16.2. Claimant—An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond is to include without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.

16.3. Construction Contract—The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

16.4. Owner Default—Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

16.5. Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor.


CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S ATTORNEY SECTION 00 62 15

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 62 15

CERTIFICATE OF OWNER'S ATTORNEY I, the undersigned, Kevin Tallant , the duly authorized and acting legal representative of the City of Cumming, Georgia, (the “City”) do hereby certify as follows: I have examined the attached Contract Documents and the manner of execution thereof by the City, and I am of the opinion that each of the aforesaid agreements are adequate and have been duly executed by the proper parties on behalf of the City; that said representative(s) has full power and authority to execute said agreements on behalf of the City; and that the foregoing agreements constitute valid and legally binding obligations upon the City in accordance with terms, conditions, and provisions thereof. By:

Date:

PRODUCER

A

A

Medical payments

B

C

DProfessional Liability

Per ClaimAnnual Aggregate

SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORETHE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED INACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS.

INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE

INSURER F :

INSURER E :

INSURER D :

INSURER C :

INSURER B :

INSURER A :

NAIC #

NAME:CONTACT

(A/C, No):FAX

E-MAILADDRESS:

(A/C, No, Ext):PHONE

INSURED

REVISION NUMBER:CERTIFICATE NUMBER:COVERAGES

IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed.If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement onthis certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).

THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THISCERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIESBELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZEDREPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.

OTHER:

(Per accident)

(Ea accident)

$

$

SUBRWVD

ADDLINSD

THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIODINDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THISCERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.

$

$

$

$PROPERTY DAMAGE

BODILY INJURY (Per accident)

BODILY INJURY (Per person)

COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT

AUTOS ONLY

AUTOSAUTOS ONLYNON-OWNED

SCHEDULEDOWNED

ANY AUTO

AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY

Y / NWORKERS COMPENSATIONAND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY

OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED?(Mandatory in NH)

DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS belowIf yes, describe under

ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE

$

$

$

E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT

E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE

E.L. EACH ACCIDENT

EROTH-

STATUTEPER

LIMITS(MM/DD/YYYY)POLICY EXP

(MM/DD/YYYY)POLICY EFF

POLICY NUMBERTYPE OF INSURANCELTRINSR

EXCESS LIAB

UMBRELLA LIAB $EACH OCCURRENCE

$AGGREGATE

$

OCCUR

CLAIMS-MADE

DED RETENTION $

$PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG

$GENERAL AGGREGATE

$PERSONAL & ADV INJURY

$MED EXP (Any one person)

$EACH OCCURRENCEDAMAGE TO RENTED

$PREMISES (Ea occurrence)

COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY

CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR

GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER:

POLICYPRO-JECT LOC

SECTION 00 62 16CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE

DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)

CANCELLATION

AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE

CERTIFICATE HOLDER

HIREDAUTOS ONLY


CHANGE ORDER FORM SECTION 00 63 63

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 63 63 CHANGE ORDER FORM

Owner: CITY OF CUMMING Engineer: CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC. Contractor: Project: CITY OF CUMMING-SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS

Date Issued: Effective Date of Change Order:

The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order:

Description:

Attachments:

Change in Contract Price Change in Contract Times Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment:

from previously approved Change Orders No. 1 to No. .

from previously approved Change Orders No.1 to No. .

Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment:

Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment:

this Change Order: this Change Order: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment:

Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for final payment:

CITY OF CUMMING CIVIL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

By:

Name: PHIL HIGGINS ANDREW E. LOVEJOY, P.E.

Title: CITY ADMINISTRATOR PRESIDENT

Date:

CONTRACTOR

By:

Name:

Title:

Date:


FINAL LIEN WAIVER SECTION 00 65 19

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 65 19 FINAL LIEN WAIVER

TO: CITY OF CUMMING, GEORGIA FROM: RE: Agreement between the City of Cumming, Georgia and ______________________ (contractor) dated , 20 for construction of the CITY OF CUMMING - SECURITY IMPROVEMENTS. I hereby certify that all suppliers of materials, equipment and services, subcontractors, mechanics and laborers employed by ______________________ (CONTRACTOR) or any of its subcontractors in Forsyth County, Georgia have been paid and satisfied in full as of , , and that there are no outstanding obligations or claims of any kind for the payment of which the City of Cumming, Georgia on the above-named project might be liable, or subject to, in any lawful proceeding at law or in equity. The undersigned is authorized by Contractor to execute this document on Contractor’s behalf and has personal knowledge of the facts herein stated.

BY: Authorized Officer or Agent Date

Title of Authorized Officer or Agent if Contractor

Printed Name of Authorized Officer or Agent

Subscribed and Sworn Before Me on this _______ day of _________________________,

Notary Public My Commission Expires: _______________________________

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Prepared by

ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE

and

Issued and Published Jointly by

EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES ______________________

ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA

______________________

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS _______________________

PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE

A Practice Division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS

Endorsed by

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE

These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (EJCDC C-520 or C-525, 2007 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the Narrative Guide to the EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC C-001, 2007 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC C-800, 2007 Edition).

Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794 (703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org

American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347-7474 www.acec.org

American Society of Civil Engineers

1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org

Associated General Contractors of America

2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308 (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org

The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE.



Page i

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ..........................................................................................................1 1.01 Defined Terms...............................................................................................................................1 1.02 Terminology..................................................................................................................................5

Article 2 – Preliminary Matters.........................................................................................................................6 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................6 2.02 Copies of Documents....................................................................................................................6 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed...............................................................6 2.04 Starting the Work ..........................................................................................................................7 2.05 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................7 2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives .................................7 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules....................................................................................................7

Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse ............................................................................8 3.01 Intent..............................................................................................................................................8 3.02 Reference Standards......................................................................................................................8 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies.......................................................................................8 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents...................................................................9 3.05 Reuse of Documents ...................................................................................................................10 3.06 Electronic Data............................................................................................................................10

Article 4 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions; Reference Points...........................................................................................................10

4.01 Availability of Lands ..................................................................................................................10 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ..........................................................................................11 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions.............................................................................11 4.04 Underground Facilities ...............................................................................................................13 4.05 Reference Points .........................................................................................................................14 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site..............................................................................14

Article 5 – Bonds and Insurance .....................................................................................................................16 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ..................................................................................16 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ...................................................................................................16 5.03 Certificates of Insurance .............................................................................................................16 5.04 Contractor’s Insurance................................................................................................................17 5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance .......................................................................................................18 5.06 Property Insurance ......................................................................................................................18 5.07 Waiver of Rights .........................................................................................................................20 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds.........................................................................21


Page ii

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace...........................................................21 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer .........................................................21

Article 6 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................................22 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence...............................................................................................22 6.02 Labor; Working Hours................................................................................................................22 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................22 6.04 Progress Schedule .......................................................................................................................23 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” .......................................................................................................23 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................25 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ...........................................................................................................27 6.08 Permits.........................................................................................................................................27 6.09 Laws and Regulations.................................................................................................................27 6.10 Taxes ...........................................................................................................................................28 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas .......................................................................................................28 6.12 Record Documents......................................................................................................................29 6.13 Safety and Protection ..................................................................................................................29 6.14 Safety Representative..................................................................................................................30 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................30 6.16 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................30 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ......................................................................................................30 6.18 Continuing the Work...................................................................................................................32 6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee..........................................................................32 6.20 Indemnification ...........................................................................................................................33 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services ..............................................................................34

Article 7 – Other Work at the Site...................................................................................................................35 7.01 Related Work at Site ...................................................................................................................35 7.02 Coordination................................................................................................................................35 7.03 Legal Relationships.....................................................................................................................36

Article 8 – Owner’s Responsibilities...............................................................................................................36 8.01 Communications to Contractor...................................................................................................36 8.02 Replacement of Engineer............................................................................................................36 8.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................36 8.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................36 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................36 8.06 Insurance .....................................................................................................................................36 8.07 Change Orders.............................................................................................................................36 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ..............................................................................................37 8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ...................................................................................37 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ....................................................................37 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .........................................................................................37 8.12 Compliance with Safety Program...............................................................................................37

Article 9 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ........................................................................................37 9.01 Owner’s Representative..............................................................................................................37 9.02 Visits to Site ................................................................................................................................37


Page iii

9.03 Project Representative ................................................................................................................38 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work ..................................................................................................38 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work ..........................................................................................................38 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments..........................................................................38 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work ..........................................................................................39 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work.....................39 9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities........................................................39 9.10 Compliance with Safety Program...............................................................................................40

Article 10 – Changes in the Work; Claims .....................................................................................................40 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ...............................................................................................40 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ...........................................................................................40 10.03 Execution of Change Orders.......................................................................................................41 10.04 Notification to Surety..................................................................................................................41 10.05 Claims..........................................................................................................................................41

Article 11 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work .......................................................................42 11.01 Cost of the Work .........................................................................................................................42 11.02 Allowances..................................................................................................................................45 11.03 Unit Price Work ..........................................................................................................................45

Article 12 – Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Times ...............................................................46 12.01 Change of Contract Price............................................................................................................46 12.02 Change of Contract Times ..........................................................................................................47 12.03 Delays..........................................................................................................................................47

Article 13 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ......................48 13.01 Notice of Defects ........................................................................................................................48 13.02 Access to Work ...........................................................................................................................48 13.03 Tests and Inspections ..................................................................................................................48 13.04 Uncovering Work........................................................................................................................49 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work.........................................................................................................50 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ................................................................................50 13.07 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................50 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work...................................................................................................51 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work .........................................................................................51

Article 14 – Payments to Contractor and Completion....................................................................................52 14.01 Schedule of Values......................................................................................................................52 14.02 Progress Payments ......................................................................................................................52 14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ...................................................................................................55 14.04 Substantial Completion...............................................................................................................55 14.05 Partial Utilization ........................................................................................................................56 14.06 Final Inspection...........................................................................................................................56 14.07 Final Payment..............................................................................................................................57 14.08 Final Completion Delayed..........................................................................................................58 14.09 Waiver of Claims ........................................................................................................................58


Page iv

Article 15 – Suspension of Work and Termination ........................................................................................58 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work ........................................................................................................58 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ...............................................................................................58 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience...................................................................................60 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ..................................................................................60

Article 16 – Dispute Resolution ......................................................................................................................61 16.01 Methods and Procedures.............................................................................................................61

Article 17 – Miscellaneous ..............................................................................................................................61 17.01 Giving Notice ..............................................................................................................................61 17.02 Computation of Times ................................................................................................................61 17.03 Cumulative Remedies .................................................................................................................62 17.04 Survival of Obligations ...............................................................................................................62 17.05 Controlling Law ..........................................................................................................................62 17.06 Headings......................................................................................................................................62


Page 1 of 62

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.

2. Agreement—The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work.

3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.

4. Asbestos—Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

5. Bid—The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed.

6. Bidder—The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner.

7. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda).

8. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements.

9. Change Order—A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.

10. Claim—A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.

11. Contract—The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral.


Page 2 of 62

12. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents.

13. Contract Price—The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work).

14. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment.

15. Contractor—The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement.

16. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 11.01 for definition.

17. Drawings—That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined.

18. Effective Date of the Agreement—The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.

19. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.

20. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times.

21. General Requirements—Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications.

22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto.

23. Hazardous Waste—The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time.

24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.

25. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property.

26. Milestone—A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work.


Page 3 of 62

27. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement.

28. Notice to Proceed—A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents.

29. Owner—The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed.

30. PCBs—Polychlorinated biphenyls.

31. Petroleum—Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils.

32. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.

33. Project—The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part.

34. Project Manual—The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents.

35. Radioactive Material—Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time.

36. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof.

37. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged.

38. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities.

39. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.


Page 4 of 62

40. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

41. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.

42. Specifications—That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto.

43. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site.

44. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.

45. Successful Bidder—The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award.

46. Supplementary Conditions—That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions.

47. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor.

48. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.

49. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.

50. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents.

51. Work Change Directive—A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an


Page 5 of 62

addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times.

1.02 Terminology

A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through F are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:

1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents.

C. Day:

1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.

D. Defective:

1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or

b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or

c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:


Page 6 of 62

1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.

2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide” is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, “provide” is implied.

F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance

A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.

B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5.

2.02 Copies of Documents

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.

2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier.


Page 7 of 62

2.04 Starting the Work

A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run.

2.05 Before Starting Construction

A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review:

1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents;

2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and

3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.

2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives

A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records.

B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party.

2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules

A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.

1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of


Page 8 of 62

the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.

2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.

3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work.

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE

3.01 Intent

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9.

3.02 Reference Standards

A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations

1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.

2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents.

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

A. Reporting Discrepancies:


Page 9 of 62

1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby.

2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation , (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04.

3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof.

B. Resolving Discrepancies:

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or

b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents

A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive.

B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways:

1. A Field Order;

2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or


Page 10 of 62

3. Engineer’s written interpretation or clarification.

3.05 Reuse of Documents

A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions; or

2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer.

B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes.

3.06 Electronic Data

A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner or Engineer, that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern.

B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party.

C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data’s creator.

ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS

4.01 Availability of Lands

A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the


Page 11 of 62

Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner’s furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.

4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site; and

2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).

B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.

4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions

A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed either:

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any “technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or

2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or


Page 12 of 62

3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents;

then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so.

B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer’s findings and conclusions.

C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A; and

b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or

b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such final commitment; or

c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, neither Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other


Page 13 of 62

professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.

4.04 Underground Facilities

A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions:

1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and

2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all such information and data;

b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents;

c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction; and

d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Not Shown or Indicated:

1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.

2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price


Page 14 of 62

or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

4.05 Reference Points

A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel.

4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the Site.

B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information.

C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible.

D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by


Page 15 of 62

Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 4.06.E.

E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 7.

G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.


Page 16 of 62

I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.

ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents.

B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond.

C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and 5.02.

5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers

A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

5.03 Certificates of Insurance

A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain.


Page 17 of 62

B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain.

C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of Contractor's full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor’s obligation to maintain such insurance.

D. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor.

E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents.

5.04 Contractor’s Insurance

A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts;

2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees;

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees;

4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained:

a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or

b. by any other person for any other reason;

5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and

6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.

B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall:


Page 18 of 62

1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, be written on an occurrence basis, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby;

2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater;

3. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor’s indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20;

4. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide);

5. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and

6. include completed operations coverage:

a. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment.

b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.

5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance

A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents.

5.06 Property Insurance

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall:


Page 19 of 62

1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee;

2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage (other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions.

3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);

4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer;

5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner;

6. include testing and startup; and

7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued.

B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such equipment breakdown insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee.

C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07.

D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property


Page 20 of 62

insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser’s own expense.

E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner.

5.07 Waiver of Rights

A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or loss payees thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued.

B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for:

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and

2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07.

C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery


Page 21 of 62

against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them.

5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds

A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the loss payees, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order.

B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner’s exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties.

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace

A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly.

5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer

A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy.


Page 22 of 62

ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

6.01 Supervision and Superintendence

A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents.

B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances.

6.02 Labor; Working Hours

A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.

B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner’s written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer.

6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work.

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.

C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.


Page 23 of 62

6.04 Progress Schedule

A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.

1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto.

2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order.

6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals”

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below.

1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an “or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer’s sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics;

2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and

3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service.

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and

2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents.


Page 24 of 62

2. Substitute Items:

a. If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item.

b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor.

c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented by the General Requirements, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances.

d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:

1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:

a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design,

b) be similar in substance to that specified, and

c) be suited to the same use as that specified;

2) will state:

a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice Contractor’s achievement of Substantial Completion on time,

b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and

c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty;

3) will identify:

a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and

b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and


Page 25 of 62

4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change.

B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.

C. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a substitute and an approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.

D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.

E. Engineer’s Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.

F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or “or-equal” at Contractor’s expense.

6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others

A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.

B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owner’s acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or


Page 26 of 62

other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work.

C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents:

1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity; nor

2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.

D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor.

E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor.

F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.

G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as a loss payee on the property insurance provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same.


Page 27 of 62

6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties

A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.

B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights.

C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents.

6.08 Permits

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work.

6.09 Laws and Regulations

A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.

B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all


Page 28 of 62

court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

6.10 Taxes

A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work.

6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas

A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:

1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work.

2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law.

3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor’s performance of the Work.

B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor


Page 29 of 62

shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.

D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.

6.12 Record Documents

A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for Owner.

6.13 Safety and Protection

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:

1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;

2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and

3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property.

C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work.


Page 30 of 62

D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site.

E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them).

F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).

6.14 Safety Representative

A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs.

6.15 Hazard Communication Programs

A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.

6.16 Emergencies

A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.

6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples

A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.


Page 31 of 62

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.

2. Samples:

a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications.

b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.

B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.

C. Submittal Procedures:

1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:

a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;

b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;

c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and

d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review and approval of that submittal.

3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop


Page 32 of 62

Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.

D. Engineer’s Review:

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.

2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1.

E. Resubmittal Procedures:

1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.

6.18 Continuing the Work

A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.

6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.

B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:


Page 33 of 62

1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.

C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

1. observations by Engineer;

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;

3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner;

4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;

5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;

6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

7. any correction of defective Work by Owner.

6.20 Indemnification

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable .

B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor,


Page 34 of 62

Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of:

1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or

2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage.

6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services

A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.

B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer.

C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.

D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1.

E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents.


Page 35 of 62

ARTICLE 7 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

7.01 Related Work at Site

A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner’s employees, or through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then:

1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and

2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors.

C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work.

7.02 Coordination

A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions:

1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified;

2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and

3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided.

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination.


Page 36 of 62

7.03 Legal Relationships

A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner.

B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor’s wrongful actions or inactions.

C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor under direct contract to Owner for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor’s wrongful action or inactions.

ARTICLE 8 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

8.01 Communications to Contractor

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer.

8.02 Replacement of Engineer

A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.

8.03 Furnish Data

A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.

8.04 Pay When Due

A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C and 14.07.C.

8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests

A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.

8.06 Insurance

A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5.

8.07 Change Orders

A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03.


Page 37 of 62

8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals

A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.B.

8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities

A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition

A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06.

8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements

A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents.

8.12 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.

ARTICLE 9 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

9.01 Owner’s Representative

A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents.

9.02 Visits to Site

A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits


Page 38 of 62

and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.

B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.

9.03 Project Representative

A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

9.04 Authorized Variations in Work

A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

9.05 Rejecting Defective Work

A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.

9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments

A. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17.


Page 39 of 62

B. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21.

C. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.

D. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14.

9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work

A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question.

B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner or Contractor believes that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer’s decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B.

C. Engineer’s written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity.

9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities

A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.


Page 40 of 62

B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.

D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents.

E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any.

9.10 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.

ARTICLE 10 – CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS

10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work

A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided).

B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work

A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04.D.


Page 41 of 62

10.03 Execution of Change Orders

A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering:

1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;

2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and

3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A.

10.04 Notification to Surety

A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change.

10.05 Claims

A. Engineer’s Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims.

B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Times shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The


Page 42 of 62

opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time).

C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions in writing:

1. deny the Claim in whole or in part;

2. approve the Claim; or

3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial.

D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied.

E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial.

F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.

ARTICLE 11 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

11.01 Cost of the Work

A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and shall include only the following items:

1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on


Page 43 of 62

Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner.

2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.

3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01.

4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work.

5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.

b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor.

c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.

d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.

e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.


Page 44 of 62

f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.

g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.

h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.

i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.

B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:

1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.

2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site.

3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.

4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A.

C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C.


Page 45 of 62

D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.

11.02 Allowances

A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

B. Cash Allowances:

1. Contractor agrees that:

a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and

b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.

C. Contingency Allowance:

1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.

D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

11.03 Unit Price Work

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.

B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07.

C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.


Page 46 of 62

D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 10.05 if:

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and

2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and

3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease.

ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES

12.01 Change of Contract Price

A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or

2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or

3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C).

C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:

1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or

2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent;

b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent;


Page 47 of 62

c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor;

d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B;

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and

f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.

12.02 Change of Contract Times

A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12.

12.03 Delays

A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God.

B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the


Page 48 of 62

control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C.

D. Owner, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.

E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor.

ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK

13.01 Notice of Defects

A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13.

13.02 Access to Work

A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.

13.03 Tests and Inspections

A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.

B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except:

1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below;

2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in Paragraph 13.04.C; and

3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.


Page 49 of 62

C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation.

F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.

13.04 Uncovering Work

A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense.

B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment.

C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.


Page 50 of 62

13.05 Owner May Stop the Work

A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.

13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work

A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).

B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work.

13.07 Correction Period

A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor’s use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions:

1. repair such defective land or areas; or

2. correct such defective Work; or

3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and

4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom.

B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute


Page 51 of 62

resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor.

C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.

D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.

E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.

13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work

A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness) and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner.

13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work

A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency.

B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, take possession of Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and


Page 52 of 62

equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph.

C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.

D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09.

ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION

14.01 Schedule of Values

A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed.

14.02 Progress Payments

A. Applications for Payments:

1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.

2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the


Page 53 of 62

Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment.

3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement.

B. Review of Applications:

1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.

2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:

a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;

b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and

c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or

b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or


Page 54 of 62

b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or

c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work, or

d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or

e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because:

a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replacement;

b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or

d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A.

C. Payment Becomes Due:

1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.

D. Reduction in Payment:

1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because:

a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s performance or furnishing of the Work;

b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens;

c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or


Page 55 of 62

d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A.

2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor remedies the reasons for such action.

3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.

14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens.

14.04 Substantial Completion

A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.

B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor.

C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner’s objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.

D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities


Page 56 of 62

pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer’s issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer’s aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment.

E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the tentative list.

14.05 Partial Utilization

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions:

1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 14.04.A through D for that part of the Work.

2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.

3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.

4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance.

14.06 Final Inspection

A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.


Page 57 of 62

14.07 Final Payment

A. Application for Payment:

1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments.

2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.6;

b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;

c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and

d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien.

B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance:

1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment.

C. Payment Becomes Due:


Page 58 of 62

1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and will be paid by Owner to Contractor.

14.08 Final Completion Delayed

A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor’s final Application for Payment (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.

14.09 Waiver of Claims

A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute:

1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and

2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled.

ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

15.01 Owner May Suspend Work

A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause

A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause:


Page 59 of 62

1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04);

2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;

3. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Engineer; or

4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor:

1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion);

2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere; and

3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.

C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.

D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice.

E. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.


Page 60 of 62

F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C.

15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience

A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):

1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;

2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses;

3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and

4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.

B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.

15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate

A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03.

B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph.


Page 61 of 62

ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION

16.01 Methods and Procedures

A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E.

B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above.

C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer’s action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor:

1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or

2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process; or

3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS

17.01 Giving Notice

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if:

1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended; or

2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice.

17.02 Computation of Times

A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.


Page 62 of 62

17.03 Cumulative Remedies

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.

17.04 Survival of Obligations

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.

17.05 Controlling Law

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.

17.06 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions.


SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SECTION 00 73 00

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

A. The provisions of the Supplementary Conditions as described herein change, amend, or supplement the General Conditions and shall supersede any conflicting provisions of this CONTRACT. All provisions of the General Conditions which are not changed, amended, or supplemented, remain in full force.

1.2 INSURANCE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect it

from claims set forth below which may arise out of, or result from, the CONTRACTOR's execution of the WORK, whether such execution be by the CONTRACTOR, any SUBCONTRACTOR, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:

1. Claims under workmen's compensation, disability benefit and other similar

employee benefit acts;

2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of employees;

3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of

any person other than employees;

4. Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by the CONTRACTOR, or (2) by any other person; and

5. Claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property,

including loss of use resulting there from.

B. Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the OWNER shall be filed with the OWNER prior to commencement of the WORK. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled unless at least thirty (30) days prior WRITTEN NOTICE has been given to the OWNER. Certificates of Insurance shall name The City of Cumming (OWNER) and Civil Engineering Consultants, Inc. (ENGINEER) as additional insured.



Page 2 of 5

C. The CONTRACTOR shall procure and maintain, at the CONTRACTOR's own expense, during the CONTRACT TIME, Liability insurance as herein after specified:

1. CONTRACTOR's General Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance

including vehicle coverage issued to the CONTRACTOR and protecting the CONTRACTOR from all claims for person injury, including death, and all claims for destruction of or damage to property, arising out of or in connection with any operations under the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, whether such operations be by the CONTRACTOR or by any SUBCONTRACTOR employed by the CONTRACTOR or anyone directly or indirectly employed by the CONTRACTOR or by a SUBCONTRACTOR employed by the CONTRACTOR.

2. Insurance shall be written with a combined single limit for all liability of bodily injury and property damage of not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence.

3. Insurance shall be written to include Excess Liability coverage of $5,000,000 for each occurrence and $5,000,000 for the aggregate amount.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall procure and maintain, at the CONTRACTOR's own

expense, during the CONTRACT TIME, in accordance with the provisions of the laws of the state in which the WORK is performed, Workmen's Compensation Insurance, including occupation disease provisions, for all of the CONTRACTOR's employees at the site of the PROJECT and in case any WORK is sublet, the CONTRACTOR shall require such SUBCONTRACTOR similarly to provide Workmen's Compensation Insurance, including occupational disease provisions for all of the latter's employees unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by the CONTRACTOR. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work under this Contract at the site of the PROJECT is not protected under Workmen's Compensation statue, the CONTRACTOR shall provide, and shall cause each SUBCONTRACTOR to provide, adequate and suitable insurance for the protection of its employees not otherwise protected.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall secure, if applicable, "All Risk" type Builder's Risk

Insurance for WORK to be performed. Unless specifically authorized by the OWNER, the amount of such insurance shall not be less than the CONTRACT PRICE totaled in the PROPOSAL. The policy shall cover not less than the losses due to fire, explosion, hail, lightning, vandalism, malicious mischief, wind, collapse, riot, aircraft, and smoke during the CONTRACT TIME, and until the WORK is accepted by the OWNER. The policy shall name as the insured the CONTRACTOR, and the OWNER. This provision shall in no way release the CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's surety from obligations under the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS to fully complete the PROJECT.



Page 3 of 5

1.3 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

A. Article 16 – Dispute Resolution, of the General Conditions, is hereby deleted in its entirety.

1.4 CONFLICTS

A. The General Conditions of the Contract shall govern in the event of any conflict with

any other provisions of the Contract Documents unless notice to the contrary shall have been issued by the Owner. In the event of conflict, the Supplementary General Conditions control over the General Conditions and the Contract controls over the Supplementary and General Conditions. The Engineer has no authority to amend the General Conditions, orally or in writing, either expressly or by implication.

B. The following principles shall govern the settlement of disputes which may arise over

conflicts in the Contract Documents: (a) as between figures given on drawings and the scaled measurements, the figures shall govern; (b) as between large-scale drawings and small-scale drawings, the larger scale shall govern; (c) as between drawings and specifications, the requirements of the specifications shall govern; and (d) as between the contract and the specifications, the requirements of the contract shall govern. Conflicts noted shall be reported to the Design Professional.

1.5 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT

A. When the work provided for under this CONTRACT shall have been completed by

the Contractor, and all parts thereof have been approved by the ENGINEER according to the CONTRACT, the ENGINEER shall, within ten (10) days unless otherwise provided, make final inspection and advise the Contractor as to preparing a final estimate, showing the value of work as soon as the necessary measurements and computations can be made, all prior certificates or estimates upon which payments have been being made approximated only, and subject to correction in the final payment. The amount of the final estimates, less any sums that may have been deducted or retained under the provisions of this CONTRACT, will be paid to the Contractor within sixty (60) days after approval by the Engineer, provided that the Contractor has properly maintained and operated the PROJECT as specified under these Specifications, and provided, that it has furnished to the Owner a sworn affidavit in form satisfactory to Owner's attorney to the effect that all bills are paid and no suits are pending in connection with the work done or labor and material furnished under this CONTRACT.

1.6 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT

A. Delete the last sentence of General Conditions Section 14.02.C.1 and replace with as

follows:

14.02.C Prompt Payment Clause



Page 4 of 5

1. Owner and contractor agree that all partial payments and final payments shall be subject to the Georgia Prompt Pay Act, as originally enacted and amended, and as set forth in O.C.G.A. 13-11-1 through 13-11-11, except as provided below to the extent authorized by law.

a. Interest Rate: For purposes of computing interest on late payments, the rate of interest shall be one-half percent per month or a pro-rata fraction thereof on the unpaid balance as may be due.

b. Payment Periods:

1. When the contractor has performed in accordance with the

provisions of these Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the Contractor within 45 days of receipt by the Owner or the Owner's representative of any properly completed Application for Payment, based upon work completed or service provided pursuant to the terms of these Contract Documents.

2. When a subcontractor has performed in accordance with the

provisions of its subcontract and the subcontract conditions precedent to payment have been satisfied, the Contractor shall pay to that subcontractor and each subcontractor shall pay to its subcontractor, within ten days of receipt by the Contractor or subcontractor of each periodic or final payment, the full amount received for such subcontractors work and materials based on work completed or service provided under the subcontract, less retainage expressed as a percentage, but such retainage shall not exceed that retainage being held by the Owner, provided that the subcontractor has provided or provides such satisfactory reasonable assurances of continued performance and financial responsibility to complete its work as the contractor in its reasonable discretion may require, including but not limited to a payment and performance bond.

c. Interest on Late Payment: Except otherwise provided in these Contract Documents and/or in O.C.G.A. 13-11-5, if a periodic or final payment to the Contractor is delayed by more than the time allotted in Paragraph b. of this Prompt Payment Clause or if a periodic or final payment to a subcontractor is delayed more than ten days after receipt of periodic or final payment by the Contractor or subcontractor, the Owner, Contractor, or subcontractor, as the case may be, shall pay interest to its Contractor, or subcontractor beginning on the day following the due dates as provided in Paragraph b. of this Prompt Payment Clause at the rate of interest as provided herein. Interest shall be computed per month or a pro-rata fraction thereof on the unpaid balance. There shall be no compounded interest. No interest is due unless the person or entity being charged interest received "Notice" as provided in Paragraph d. of this Prompt Payment Clause. Acceptance or progress payments or final payment shall release all claims for interest on said payments.



Page 5 of 5

d. Notice of Late Payment and Request of Interest: Any person or entity asserting entitlement to interest on any periodic or final payment pursuant to the provisions of this Prompt Payment Clause shall provide "notice" to the person or entity being charged interest of the charging party's claim to the interest on late payment. "Notice" shall be in writing, serviced by U.S. Certified Mail--Return Receipt Requested at the time the properly completed Application for Payment is received by the Owner or Owner's representative, and shall set forth the following:

1. A short and concise statement that interest is due pursuant to the

provisions of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act and this Prompt Payment Clause;

2. The principal amount of the periodic or final payment which is

allegedly due to the charging party; and

3. The first day and date upon which the charging party alleges that said interest will begin to accrue, pursuant to the provisions of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act and this Prompt Payment Clause.

These "Notice" provisions are of the essence; therefore, failure to comply with any requirement as set forth in the Prompt Payment Clause precludes the right to interest on any alleged late payment to which said "Notice" would otherwise apply.

2. Integration with the Georgia Prompt Pay Act:

Unless otherwise provided in these Contract Documents, the parties hereto agree that these provisions of this Prompt Payment Clause supersede and control all provisions of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act (O.C.G.A. 13-11-1 through 13-11-11 (1994)), as originally enacted and as amended, and that any dispute arising between the parties hereto as to whether or not the provisions of this contract or the Georgia Prompt Pay Act control will be resolved in favor of these Contract Documents and its terms.

1.7 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS

A. There is no geotechnical report regarding subsurface conditions.

B. All excavation is considered unclassified excavation.

END OF SECTION


SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01 11 00

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work to be done under this Contract shall include the furnishing of all materials, equipment, labor and means of construction necessary for the construction of the City of Cumming – Security Improvements and all other work as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as specified herein including.

B. Work shall include clean-up and dress-up and all repair work necessary to restore pavement, lawns, and finished areas as closely as possible to their original condition following installation of the work.

C. All work pertaining to any requirements contained herein shall be included in the overall proposal submitted unless such cost is designated as a separate pay item in the Proposal Schedule.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for all necessary local and state licenses, permits and taxes.

E. The Contractor will be required to deliver all equipment and other materials to the location of installation. Care shall be exercised in handling all materials and equipment, and the Contractor will be held responsible for all breakage or damage to same.

F. Equipment provided for this project shall be Made in USA. The Manufacturer that

promotes their products as Made in USA must meet the “all or virtually all” standard. The Manufacturer must demonstrate compliance with this standard.

1.2 WORK AND MATERIALS BY THE OWNER

A. The Owner shall provide personnel to operate existing system and will oversee all

connections to existing system made by the Contractor's personnel.

1.3 OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT CLAUSE

A. Whenever a material or article required is specified or shown on the Contract Drawings by using the name of the proprietary product or of a particular manufacturer or vendor, any material or article which will meet design criteria and is equal in function and durability, as determined by the Engineer, will be considered acceptable.



Page 2 of 3

1.4 COMPLIANCE OF WORK WITH SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor will be supplied with three sets of the Drawings and Specifications.

Of these sets, one complete set shall be available on the job site at all times.

B. Should any portion of the Drawings and/or Specifications be obscure or in dispute, it shall be referred to the Engineer and he shall decide as to the true meaning and intent. He shall have the right to correct errors and omissions at any time when those corrections are necessary for the proper fulfillment of the Drawings and Specifications.

C. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with every reasonable facility for ascertaining whether or not the work performed, and materials used are in accord with the requirements and intent of the Specifications and Drawings. The Contractor shall give the work the constant attention necessary to facilitate the progress thereof and shall cooperate with the Engineer and with other contractors in every way possible.

D. The Contractor shall employ only competent and skilled personnel on the work. At all times when the work is in progress, the Contractor shall have a competent Superintendent or Foreman present with authority to receive orders, execute the work and to promptly supply materials, tools, plant equipment and labor as may be required. Should the Engineer so demand, the Contractor shall immediately remove any Superintendent, Foreman or worker whom the Engineer considers incompetent, undesirable, or both.

E. The Project Engineer shall be authorized to inspect all work done and all materials furnished, including the preparation, fabrication and manufacture of the materials to be used. The Project Engineer shall be authorized to alter or waive the requirements of the Specifications. He may reject materials and suspend the work.

F. No work shall be done, nor materials used without suitable supervision and/or inspection by the Engineer or his representative. Failure to reject defective work and/or materials shall not in any way preclude later rejection when that defect is discovered or obligate the Owner to final acceptance.



Page 3 of 3

G. Inspection of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to fulfill his contract. Defective work shall be made good even if such work and/or materials have been previously inspected by the Engineer or his representative and accepted or included in an estimate for payment. All rejected work and/or materials shall immediately be removed and replaced with materials and work in accord with the Specifications and Drawings. If the Contractor fails to remove the defective work and/or materials within ten days after having been ordered to do so, the Owner shall have the right and authority to stop the Contractor and suspend the work at once and to supply personnel and material to remove and replace that defective work and/or materials at the expense of the Contractor.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. In case of conflict between the requirements in the Technical Specifications, that

requirement which is in compliance with all the applicable codes and which is, in the opinion of the Engineer, more advantageous to the Owner, shall govern. This shall apply to all requirements indicated by the Technical Specifications of the Contract Documents.

1.6 EROSION CONTROL MONITORING

A. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of the State of Georgia General

NPDES Permit for Storm Water Discharges from Construction Activities, General Permit No. GAR 100000. The cost of the work from the Notice of Intent to the Notice of Termination and all other activities related to the Erosion and Sedimentation Control Program shall be included in the Lump Sum Proposal Item for Erosion Control Monitoring in the Proposal Schedule.

END OF SECTION


MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SECTION 01 22 00

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01 22 00

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. The Proposal Schedule lists each item of the Project for which payment will be made. No payment will be made for any items other than those listed in the Proposal Schedule.

B. Required items of work and incidentals necessary for the satisfactory completion of the

work which are not specifically listed in the Proposal Schedule, and which are not specified in this Section to be measured or to be included in one of the items listed in the Proposal Schedule, shall be considered as incidental to the work. All costs thereof, including Contractor's overhead costs and profit, shall be considered as included in the lump sum or unit prices proposed for the various Proposal items. The Contractor shall prepare the Proposal accordingly.

C. Work includes furnishing all labor, equipment, tools, and materials, which are not

furnished by the Owner and performing all operations required to complete the work satisfactorily, in place, as specified and as indicated on the Drawings.

1.2 DESCRIPTIONS

A. Measurement of an item of work will be by the unit indicated in the Proposal Schedule. B. Final payment quantities shall be determined from the record drawings. The record

drawing lengths, dimensions, quantities, etc., shall be determined by a measurement by the Engineer for any Unit Price Proposal items after the completion of all required work. The precision of final payment quantities shall match the precision shown for that item in the Proposal Schedule.

C. Payment will include all necessary and incidental related work not specified to be

included in any other item of work listed in the Proposal Schedule. D. Unless otherwise stated in individual Sections of the Specifications or in the Proposal

Schedule, no separate payment will be made for any item of work, materials, parts, equipment, supplies, or related items required to perform and complete the work. The costs for all such items required shall be included in the price proposed for item of which it is a part.



Page 2 of 3

E. Payment will be made by extending unit prices multiplied by quantities provided and then summing the extended prices to reflect actual work. Such price and payment shall constitute full compensation to the Contractor for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and materials not furnished by the Owner and for performing all operations required to provide to the Owner the entire Project, complete in place, as specified and as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

1.3 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED OR UNUSED PRODUCTS

A. Payment will not be made for following:

1. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected material. 2. Quantities of material wasted or disposed of in manner not called for under Contract

Documents. 3. Rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been placed by

reason of failure of Contractor to conform to provisions of Contract Documents.

4. Material not unloaded from transporting vehicle. 5. Material and equipment not properly stored. 6. Defective Work not accepted by Owner. 7. Material remaining on hand after completion of work.

1.4 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Partial Payment: No partial payments will be made for materials and equipment

delivered or stored unless Shop Drawings or preliminary operation and maintenance manuals are acceptable to Engineer.

B. Final Payment: Will be made only for products incorporated in work; remaining

products, for which partial payments have been made, shall revert to Contractor unless otherwise agreed, and partial payments made for those items will be deducted from final payment.



Page 3 of 3

1.5 OWNER CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE

A. This item shall be used for payment for additional Work performed at the discretion and direction of the Owner and the Engineer which is not included in the other Proposal Items in the Proposal Form. The Contingency or portion thereof shall not be paid to the Contractor except for additional work ordered in writing by the Engineer. A cost proposal for each item of additional work shall be prepared by the Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions for the Engineer’s review as required by the General Conditions and other Sections of the Specifications. The total amount of Contingency funds paid to the Contractor shall be the total amount agreed to and ordered performed, which shall not necessarily be the total amount shown in the Proposal Schedule.

1.6 STAKING

A. Owner shall provide all staking including limits of disturbance, property and right of way limits, and construction layout. Surveying shall be performed once only. Staking shall include offset and cut stakes.

B. Any replacement stakes or other survey services shall be at the expense of the

contractor.

C. Contractor shall request staking so that it is done 7-days prior to the construction to allow time for Owner and Engineer to verify locations or proposed utilities.

SECURITY PAYMENT ITEMS

1.7 SECURITY INSTALLATION A. Security Installation, which is to be paid for on a unit price basis will be measured for

payment after installation.

B. The Lump Sum Unit Price in the Proposal Schedule shall include the cost of the Work, all labor and materials necessary to install security cameras, related work, and appurtenances at the location shown on the Contract Drawings and for the complete installation of the camera in accordance with Contract Documents. Work shall include installation of electrical and instrumentation work interior and exterior, and accessories, and shall include license and software fees.

END OF SECTION


ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 30 00

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL

1.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. The Engineer shall schedule the pre-construction conference prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed.

B. Representatives of the following parties are to be in attendance at the meeting:

1. Owner.

2. Engineer.

3. Contractor and superintendent.

4. Major subcontractors.

5. Representatives of governmental or regulatory agencies when appropriate.

C. The agenda for the pre-construction conference shall consist of the following as a minimum:

1. Distribute and discuss a list of major subcontractors and a tentative construction

schedule.

2. Critical work sequencing.

3. Designation of responsible personnel and emergency telephone numbers.

4. Processing of field decisions and change orders.

5. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.

6. Schedule and submittal of shop drawings, product data and samples.

7. Pay request format, submittal cutoff date, pay date and retainage.



Page 2 of 3

1.2 COORDINATION WITH PROJECT ENGINEER

A. During the course of work under this Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the Project Engineer informed of his work schedule and of his requirements con-cerning staking and inspection as herein specified.

B. In the event that any work subject to inspection or testing by the Project Engineer is

installed without notification in time for such testing or inspection to be done, that work shall be subject to removal and replacement by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall not put workers on the job or perform any work on any portion of the

project without prior knowledge of the Project Engineer that such work is to be done, the place of work, and the scheduled starting time. A minimum 24-hour notification to the Project Engineer is required.

1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Contractor shall schedule and hold periodic progress meetings at least every month just

prior to submittal of the monthly partial payment request and at other times as requested by Engineer or required by progress of the work. Contractor, Engineer, and all Subcontractors active on the site shall be represented at each meeting. Contractor may at his discretion request attendance by representatives of his suppliers, manufacturers, and other Subcon-tractors.

B. Contractor shall preside at the meetings and provide for keeping and distribution of the

minutes. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the work, maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in scheduling, and resolve other problems which may develop.

C. The Contractor shall provide a list of all subcontractors to the Engineer, for information

only, at the Pre-Construction Conference. If the Contractor makes any additions or changes to this list, the Contractor shall resubmit the amended list to the Engineer and Owner immediately.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner an Estimated Construction Progress Schedule

immediately after execution and delivery of the Contract and before the first partial payment is made.



Page 3 of 3

B. The Schedule shall show the anticipated dates of commencement and completion of each of the various types of work required under the Contract Documents and the anticipated amount of each monthly payment that will become due the Contractor in accordance with the Progress Schedule.

C. The construction costs employed in making up these Schedules will be used only for

determining the basis of partial payments and will not be considered as fixing a basis of additions to or deductions from the Contract price.

1.5 PROJECT LAYOUT

A. The Engineer will furnish the Contractor with a list of coordinates for the various project

structures, as well as benchmark locations and elevations. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying these elevations and locations and for laying out the Work. The cost of this surveying shall be the responsibility of the Owner.

1.6 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. All construction work on public rights-of-way shall be done in accordance with the rules

and regulations of the agency having control. All safety equipment and markings shall be furnished by the Contractor.

B. Work done on such rights-of-way shall be done only with the written consent of and in

strict accordance with the Specifications of the right-of-way owner. C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the right-of-way owner's field

engineer before doing any work within the right-of-way. D. All construction work shall be performed in accordance with established construction safety

standards, and the Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of his employees and the public. All applicable local, state and Federal regulations, including the Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA), 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart P, latest edition shall be adhered to by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 33 00

Page 1 of 7

SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. The work under this Section includes submittal to the Engineer of shop drawings, product data and samples required by the various Sections of these Specifications.

B. Within 30 days after Notice to Proceed is issued, the Contractor shall review, approve and submit one (1) electronic copy in PDF format of all shop drawings and/or manufacturers’ descriptions sheets for all materials and/or equipment for the approval of the Engineer.

C. Definitions: Submittals are categorized as follows: 1. Shop Drawings:

a. Shop drawings shall include technical data, drawings, diagrams, procedures and methodology, performance curves, schedules, templates, patterns, test reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar information as applicable to the specific item for which the shop drawing is prepared.

b. Provide newly-prepared information, on reproducible sheets, with graphic information at accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated) or appropriate number of prints hereof, with name or preparer (firm name) indicated. The Contract Drawings shall not be traced or reproduced by any method for use as or in lieu of detailed shop drawings. Show dimensions and note dimensions that are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in the work shown. Indicate compliance with standards and special coordination requirements. Do not allow shop drawings to be used in connection with the work without appropriate final “Action” markings by the Engineer.

c. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, Specification Section, schedule, or room numbers shown on the Contract Drawings.

d. Minimum assembly drawings sheet size shall be 11 x 17-inches. e. Minimum detail sheet size shall be 8-1/2 x 11-inches. f. Minimum Scale:

1. Civil / Site: 1-inch = 30 feet. 2. All others: 1/4-inch = 1 foot.



Page 2 of 7

2. Product Data:

a. Product data includes standard printed information on materials, products, and systems, not specially prepared for this Project, other than the designation of selections from among available choices printed therein.

b. Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system and mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to the Project. Include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field measurements that have been checked and special coordination requirements.

3. Samples:

a. Samples include both fabricated and un-fabricated physical examples of materials, products, and units of work, both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of work, either for limited visual inspection or, where indicated, for more detailed testing and analysis.

b. Provide units identical with final condition of proposed materials or products for the work. Include “range” samples, not less than three units, where unavoidable variations must be expected, and describe or identify variations between units of each set. Provide a full set of optional samples where the Engineer's selection is required. Prepare samples to match the Engineer's sample where indicated. Include information with each sample to show generic description, source or product name and manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with standards. Samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for review to confirm the color, pattern, texture, and “kind”. The Engineer will note “test” samples, except as otherwise indicated, for other requirements, which are the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

c. Miscellaneous submittals related directly to the work (non-administrative) include warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, Project photographs, survey data and reports, physical work records, statements of applicability, quality testing and certifying reports, copies of industry standards, record drawings, field measurement data, operating and maintenance materials, overrun stock, security/protection/safety keys and similar information, devices and materials applicable to the work but not processed as shop drawings, product data or samples.

1.2 SPECIFIC CATEGORY REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated in the individual work sections, comply with the general requirements specified herein for each indicated category of submittal. Submittals shall contain:

1. The date of submittal and the dates of any previous submittals.

2. The Project title.



Page 3 of 7

3. The submittal number as indicated as follows:

a. Submittal Identification and Packaging: Shop drawing submittals to the Engineer shall be numbered beginning with 1, with the applicable Specification Section in parenthesis after the submittal number. Should any submittal be returned for resubmittal, that resubmittal shall be numbered 1.1 and so on. The Contractor shall identify as an activity in the CPM schedule, all major equipment submittals as well as those involving complex reviews and long lead deliveries. Submittal schedule information shall be updated monthly with the Contractor’s updated Project CPM schedule.

b. Contractor

c. Supplier

d. Manufacturer

4. Identification of the product, with the Specification Section number, permanent equipment tag numbers and applicable Drawing No.

5. Field dimensions clearly identified as such.

6. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.

7. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers.

8. Notification to the Engineer in writing of any deviations to the requirements of the Contract Documents. The notification of deviation shall be clearly marked by the Contractor in the body of the submittal and stated in text in the Contractor’s remarks on the transmittal document of the submittal. Indicate the reasons for the deviations and the benefits to the Project.

9. Identification of revisions on re-submittals.

10. An 8 x 3-inch blank space for Contractor and Engineer stamps.

11. A stamp, initialed or signed, certifying the Contractor’s review of the submittal and indicating the submittal’s status relative to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.3 ROUTING OF SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals and routine correspondence shall be routed as follows:

1. Supplier to Contractor (through representative if applicable)

2. Contractor to Engineer

3. Engineer to Contractor and Owner

4. Contractor to Supplier

1.4 SUBMITTAL LOG

A. The submittal log shall be created by the Engineer and issued to the Contractor as the complete listing of submittals required for the Project.



Page 4 of 7

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Engineer, make all shop drawings accurately to scale and large enough and in sufficient detail to show all pertinent features of the submitted item and its method of connection to the work.

B. Submit all shop drawings larger than 11” x 17” in the form of one clean black and white copy.

2.2 MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE

A. Where the content of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to this submittal, clearly indicate which portion of the contents is being submitted for the Engineer's review.

2.3 SAMPLES

A. Samples shall illustrate the material, workmanship, and established standards by which completed work is judged.

B. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Engineer, all samples shall be made of and derived from the proposed product to be furnished.

C. Submit the number of samples that are desired by the Contractor to be returned plus one sample, which will be retained by the Engineer on site. Samples shall be reviewed and comments, if any, returned to the Contractor electronically with the status of the submittal indicated.

2.4 COLORS

A. Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically described in the Contract Documents, wherever a choice of color or pattern is available in a specified product, submit accurate color charts and pattern charts to the Engineer for review and selection.

B. Submit the number of color and pattern charts that are desired by the Contractor to be returned plus three charts to be retained by the Engineer.

C. Unless all available colors and patterns have identical costs and identical wearing capabilities, and are identically suited to the installation, completely describe the relative costs and capabilities of each.



Page 5 of 7

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR’S COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to submittal for the Engineer's review, the Contractor shall use all means necessary to fully coordinate all material and products, including the following procedures:

1. Determine and verify all field dimensions and conditions, catalog numbers and similar data.

2. Coordinate as required with all trades and all public agencies involved.

3. Submit a written statement of review and certification of compliance with the requirements of all applicable technical Specifications as well as the requirements of this Section.

4. Clearly indicate in a letter or memorandum on the manufacturer's or fabricator's letterhead, all deviations from the Contract Documents. Clearly mark the deviation in the body of the submittal and state the deviation on the transmittal form of the submittal. Describe the benefits and reasons for the deviation.

B. Each shop drawing sheet and the cover page of all data shall bear the Contractor's stamp showing that the submittal has been fully reviewed. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the Contractor's stamp will not be reviewed by the Engineer. The submittal will be returned to the Contractor for conformance with this requirement.

C. The Owner, at its discretion, may charge the Contractor for the Engineer’s review cost if more than two reviews of a submittal occur before a “No Exceptions Taken” status is achieved.

D. Packaging of Submittals:

1. Submittals shall be packaged. Submittals in packages shall be submitted simultaneously. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer, make all submittals in packages containing all submittals indicated by the submittal log to be packaged together.

2. No review will be given to partial submittals or incomplete packages of submittals. It is the Contractor's responsibility to assemble the shop drawings for interconnecting and interdependent items, check them and then make one submittal to the Engineer along with Contractor's comments as to compliance, non-compliance or features requiring special attention.

3. The Engineer will provide the Contractor the list of packages with the submittal log.



Page 6 of 7

E. List of Submittals: The Engineer will create the submittal log and identify how the submittals are to be packaged. The Contractor may propose changes and supplements to the log.

3.2 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide all required time for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revision and re-submittal, and for placing orders and securing delivery. Time lost due to unacceptable submittals shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

B. In scheduling, allow sufficient time for the Engineer's review following the receipt of the submittal.

3.3 REVIEWED SUBMITTALS

A. Engineer Review:

1. Allow 30 days for the Engineer's processing of each submittal, including re-submittals, requiring review and response, except allow longer periods for submittals needing coordination with subsequent submittals. The Engineer shall inform the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be held for coordination. Allow a minimum of two weeks for reprocessing each submittal requiring coordination.

2. Acceptable submittals with no review comment shall be marked “No Exceptions Taken”.

3. Acceptable submittals with a minor comment or comments offered merely to alert the Contractor to some issue or provide information will be marked “No Exceptions Taken with Comment”.

4. Submittals requiring minor corrections will be marked “Make Corrections Noted”. The Contractor may order, fabricate and ship the products, provided the indicated corrections are made. A submittal with an “Make Corrections Noted” status must be re-submitted for review and marked “No Exceptions Taken” prior to installation or use of the submitted product.

5. Submittals marked “Rejected” are not acceptable. Upon return of a submittal so marked, the Contractor shall repeat the initial review procedure utilizing acceptable products.

B. No product shall be installed that does not have a corresponding submittal bearing a status of “No Exceptions Taken” or “No Exceptions Taken with Comment”. The Contractor shall maintain at the job site a complete set of current submittals indicating the review status established by the Engineer.



Page 7 of 7

C. Substitutions: In the event the Contractor obtains the Engineer's approval for the use of products other than those which are listed first in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's own expense and using methods approved by the Engineer, make any changes to structures, piping and electrical work that may be necessary to accommodate these products. Use of the “No Exceptions Taken” notation on shop drawings or other submittals is general and shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing products of the proper dimension, size, quality, quantity, materials and all performance characteristics, to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. The Engineer's review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors of any kind on the submittals. Review is intended only to assure conformance with the design concept of the Project and compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site. The Contractor is also responsible for information that pertains solely to the fabrication processes or to the technique of construction and for the coordination of the work of all trades.

3.4 RE-SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Clearly mark and alert the Engineer to the presence of changes within the re-submittal that are other than those required by the Engineer’s comments on the previous submittal.

END OF SECTION


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 40 00

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows:

AASHTO American Association State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISC American Iron and Steel Institute

ANSI American National Standard Institute ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWWA American Water Works Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Fed Spec Federal Specifications

IBBM Iron Body, Bronze-Mounted IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NPT National Pipe Thread UL Underwriter's Laboratories

1.2 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. All materials furnished and work done by the Contractor at any time during the progress of

the work shall be subject to the inspection of the Engineer, who shall have full power to accept or reject any part thereof. The Contractor shall remedy any defective or unsatisfactory work or material at no additional cost to the Owner. In the event the Contractor fails to initiate corrections within 48 hours after written notice, the Engineer shall have full right to have same done and to bill the Contractor for cost thereof. Any condemned material must be removed from the work within 24 hours at no additional cost to the Owner.


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 40 00

Page 2 of 2

1.3 COMPETENT LABOR

A. The Contractor shall employ only competent and skilled personnel on the work. Either the on-site project manager or the field superintendent, as listed in the Contractor’s statement of qualifications, must be on site full time for the duration of the project. The on-site project manager or the field superintendent shall have the authority to receive orders and execute the Work. Should there be a change from the listed on-site project manager and/or field superintendent, the Contractor is to submit resume of proposed personnel to Engineer for approval.

1.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Testing will be performed according to the procedures detailed for each portion of the

utility system improvements. Payment for testing not specifically stated to be paid for by the Owner is to be included in the construction costs proposed for the item to be tested.

END OF SECTION


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01 50 00

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This Section includes requirements for the installation, maintenance and removal of temporary utilities, controls, facilities, and construction aids during construction.

1.2 SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Contractor must provide portable toilet facilities during construction activities. The

Contractor shall pay all costs for sanitary facilities.

1.3 PARKING AND WORK AREAS

A. The Contractor must park equipment, construction, and private vehicles, in a safe manner off all travel lanes.

1.4 EROSION CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the State of Georgia General NPDES

Permit for Storm Water Discharges from Construction Activities, General Permit No. GAR100002. The cost of the work from the Notice of Intent to the Notice of Termination and all other activities related to the Erosion and Sedimentation Control Program shall be included in the overall cost of the project. No separate payment will be made for this work.

B. All erosion and sedimentation control measures and Best Management Practices (BMPs)

must be in conformance to the State of Georgia Erosion and Sedimentation Control Act of 1975, as currently amended. All erosion and sedimentation control measures must be installed in accordance with the Manual for Erosion and Sedimentation Control in Georgia, as currently amended.

C. At a minimum the General Permit includes having BMP plan on site, initial inspection for

BMP record keeping, rain measurement, repairs, etc. D. Contractor is responsible for all sampling in order to comply with the General Permit.

E. All Erosion and Sedimentation control measures must be installed prior to initiation of

construction activity.



Page 2 of 3

1.5 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Potable Water: Potable water will be available from the Owner for drinking from a cooler, etc. Contractor shall pay for all costs to transfer water from source to point of use.

B. Telephone: Telephone service is not available from the Owner. Contractor shall pay all

costs to establish a separate telephone service.

C. Internet: Contractor must maintain an e-mail account over the duration of the contract.

1.6 DUST CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall provide dust control at all times, including holidays and weekends, as required to abate dust nuisance on and about the site which is a result of construction activities. Dust control shall be by means of sprinklered water or by other approved methods, except that chemicals, oil, or similar palliatives shall not be used.

B. Quantities and equipment for dust control shall be sufficient to effectively prevent dust

nuisance on and about the jobsite; and when weather conditions warrant, sprinklering equipment shall be on hand at all times for immediate availability.

C. The Engineer shall have authority to order dust control work whenever conditions warrant,

and there shall be no additional cost to the Owner, therefore. Dust control shall be effectively maintained whether or not the Engineer orders such work.

D. Complaints from the public shall be reported to the Engineer and shall be acted on

immediately.

E. Where earthwork operations are in progress, keep exposed earth surfaces dampened continuously. Also, keep dirt accessways and roads dampened continuously.

F. If portions of the site are temporarily inactive or abandoned for whatever reason, provide

dust control and abatement continuously during such periods of inactivity.

G. Where dust resulting from construction activities has collected on public sidewalks and streets, hose down such sidewalks and streets to abate flying dust particles. Clean all sidewalks and streets from accumulated dirt and dust.



Page 3 of 3

1.7 MUD CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall take measures to prevent tracking of mud onto public streets, drives, and sidewalks.

B. All egress from the site shall be maintained in a dry condition, and any mud tracked onto

streets, sidewalks, or drives shall be immediately removed, and the affected area shall be cleaned. The Engineer may order such work at any time the conditions warrant.

C. Where trucks will leave a muddy site and enter paved road surfaces, the Contractor shall

maintain a suitable truck wheel-washing facility and crew. All trucks, or other vehicles leaving the site, shall be cleaned of mud and dirt, including mud and dirt clinging to exterior body surfaces of vehicles.

D. All trucks coming to the jobsite or leaving the jobsite with materials or loose debris shall be

loaded in a manner that will prevent dropping of materials or debris on streets. Spillage resulting from hauling operations along or across any public traveled way shall be removed immediately.

END OF SECTION


EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 70 00

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GUARANTEE OF WORK

A. All work shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and material for a period of one year after the date of acceptance by the Owner.

1.2 PUNCH LIST

A. The Engineer and Owner will perform a Punch List inspection after Substantial

Completion.

B. The punch list is the basis for establishing Final Completion for the Work. The schedule for completing and/or correcting punch list activities shall be no longer than 30 consecutive calendar days for intermediate milestones and 60 consecutive calendar days for final contract completion but shall be scheduled to conclude on or before the contract completion date and it shall be initiated immediately upon Substantial Completion. The overall Contract duration is based upon a 60-day period following the contractual date for Substantial Completion to establish the contractual date for Final Completion. Later delivery of Substantial Completion shall not revise the Final Acceptance date. Assessment of liquidated damages for late Substantial Completion shall not relieve assessment of liquidated damages for Final Acceptance should Final Acceptance be established beyond the contractual completion date.

1.3 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Project Record Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to Final Acceptance for

Payment is recommended.

B. Legibly make drawings to record actual construction including, but not limited to:

1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities

2. Field changes of dimensions and details

3. Details not on original Contract Drawings

END OF SECTION


GENERAL ELECTRIC PROVISIONS SECTION 26 00 00

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 26 00 00

GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install all materials, equipment, labor, supervision and services necessary to complete all electrical work specified herein, and shown on the Drawings.

B. Principal Features 1. New Avigilon Security System at the Water Treatment Plant 2. New Avigilon Security System at the Raw Water Intake 3. Complete system of conduits, cables and conductors to supply electrical energy to the security

system components.

1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES

A. Local, State, and National Electrical Codes.

B. National Electrical Code, latest edition.

C. Rules of the Electrical Utility and the National Electrical Safety Code.

D. Life Safety Code 101.

E. NECA Standard of Installation.

F. NFPA (National Fire Protection Association).

1.3 FEES AND TESTS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for all fees for permits, inspections, and tests necessary to complete this work. Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner and the Engineer that all items of equipment installed are completely operational and free of defects in all modes.

1.4 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Furnish and locate all anchor bolts, inserts and supports for installation by the other trades as required. Coordinate the location of all fixtures, outlets, equipment, and devices with other trades to avoid conflicts.



Page 2 of 5

1.5 LIST OF PROPOSED MANUFACTURERS

A. List of Proposed Materials: The Contractor shall submit a complete list of the proposed manufacturers for each proposed items as required to complete the work. Additional submittal data, sufficient to determine equality, shall be required if the Contractor proposes to substitute another manufacturer’s equipment. 1. Intent of Drawings

a. Electrical plan drawings show only general locations of equipment, devices and raceways,unless specifically dimensioned. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper routingof raceway, subject to the review of the Engineer.

2. Departures from Contract Documentsa. Submit to the Engineer in writing details of any necessary, proposed departures from these

Contract Documents, and the reasons, therefore. Submit such requests as soon as practicableand within 30 days after award of the Contract. Make no such departures without writtenapproval of the Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REFERENCE TO DRAWINGS

A. Reference shall be made to Drawing Schedules, Details, Notes, and Specifications for: Manufacturer, model, catalog number, size, capacity, performance, ratings and installation of equipment and material.

2.2 CHOICE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. In submitting substitutions, proposers should note the following minimum considerations: (1) capacities shown are absolute minimal and must be equaled, (2) physical size limitations for space allotted, (3) structural properties, (4) noise level, (5) interchangeability, (6) compatibility with other materials and assemblies, (7) similar items shall be same manufacture and style wherever possible.

B. All material and equipment, for which a UL, ANSI, or a NEMA Standard is established, shall be so approved and labeled or stamped.

C. Adhesives are not acceptable as a mounting, supporting, or assembling technique, unless noted otherwise.

2.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. NEMA Standards shall be taken as minimum requirements for electrical equipment.

B. Equipment shall operate properly under a plus or minus 10 percent voltage variation.

2.4 SUBMITTALS DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide complete manufacturers’ descriptive information and shop drawings for all permanently installed equipment, material and devices furnished under Division 26, Electrical, including certified outline drawings, arrangement drawings, elementary (schematic) diagrams, interconnection and



Page 3 of 5

connection diagrams, in accordance with provisions elsewhere in these Contract Documents. Provide the number of copies specified in Section 01 33 00. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 70 00.

B. Provide certified shop drawings, literature and requested samples showing items proposed for use, size, dimensions, capacity, special features required, schematic (elementary) control diagrams, equipment schedules, rough-in, etc., as required by the Engineer for complete review and for use during installation. Use NEMA device designations and symbols for all electric circuit diagrams submitted. Make content of the schematic (elementary) connection or interconnection diagrams in accordance with the latest edition of NEMA ICS 1.

C. Manufacturer’s standardized elementary diagrams will not be acceptable unless applicable portions of the diagram have been clearly identified and non-applicable portions deleted or crossed out.

D. Certified arrangement drawings, outline dimensions, and weights for all major (engineered) equipment including, but not limited to: 1. PoE Switches. 2. Network Rack. 3. Monitors.

E. Certified drawings and descriptive literature for all equipment and devices furnished under Division 26, Electrical, and not listed above.

F. Interconnection Diagrams for: 1. Complete Interconnecting Wiring Diagram of entire Security System at the Water Treatment

Plant and Intake

G. Interconnection Diagrams showing all internal wiring and all required field connections for the following: 1. Security System

H. The interconnection diagrams shall show terminal points, intermediate connections, device designation, terminal numbers, polarity of dc circuits, conductor identification, and any other information necessary to show which conductor connects to which point; the Contractor shall review and sign off on the control interconnection diagrams.

I. In addition to submittals for specific items mentioned above, furnish shop drawing information on the following items: 1. Conduit, tubing, and fittings. 2. Power conductors. 3. Wireway. 4. Outlet and device boxes. 5. Pull boxes and junction boxes. 6. Terminal junction boxes. 7. Manholes and handholes. 8. 600-volt conductors. 9. Medium Voltage Conductors. 10. Control cable. 11. Receptacles. 12. Surge suppressors



Page 4 of 5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for electrical connections to all equipment requiring electrical power. This responsibility applies to equipment furnished under this and other Divisions and by the Owner.

3.2 RECORD AND AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain at the job site a set of Contract Documents kept current by indicating thereon all changes, revisions and substitutions, between work as specified and as installed.

B. Furnish Owner with complete set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

3.3 EQUIPMENT OPERATION

A. This Division is responsible for: (1) proper rotation, (2) observing that lubrication has been properly performed, (3) that motors operate within nameplate limits, and (4) adjustment of circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.

3.4 CLEANING AND PAINTING

A. Fixtures, panels and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. All equipment shall be touched up or repainted as required to present a clean professional appearance. Paint all ferrous metal that is not otherwise protected against corrosion. Paint exposed pipe threads with Bitumastic No. 50.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all major items of equipment including camperas, network racks, PoE Switch Cabinets, Monitors and junction boxes by permanent nameplates, with wording approved by Engineer. Secure metal nameplate frame with screws or brads. Adhesives are acceptable on components within NEMA 1 enclosures.

B. Nameplates after installation shall be easily visible and shall bear notations corresponding to those shown on record drawings.

C. Each cable shall be identified with a permanent labeling system (Brady Catalog Number B-292 with printed legends or approved equal). Instrumentation cables shall be labeled with the appropriate instrument number of the originating signal (Ex. FT-2020-1). Multiplex cables, power and control cables shall be labeled with the appropriate cable number per the conduit and cable schedules.

D. All switchgears, MCC’s, MCC compartments, power panels, lighting panels, control panels, control cabinets, etc. shall be identified with permanently mounted phenolic labels.

E. All power and lighting panels shall have typed schedules mounted on panel doors.

3.6 TEST PERIOD

A. Each piece of equipment shall continue to meet performance specifications throughout the first year of operation. Contractor shall replace or repair any defect due to faulty workmanship or material which



Page 5 of 5

shall develop within 1 year from date of acceptance. This guaranty shall be in accordance with Article 23 Section 00 72 14.

B. For first year after final acceptance, Contractor shall provide, at no cost to Owner, any required maintenance and service necessary to assure the proper operation of the system. Date of acceptance shall be certified by Engineer as that date on which the Contract Work has been satisfactorily completed, as a whole, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3.7 GROUNDING

A. See Specification 26 05 26.

3.8 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND START-UP

A. Typewritten directories shall be inserted in all panels showing the designation of each circuit. All power and replacement fuses necessary for testing shall be furnished and paid for under this item.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. The electrical contractor shall coordinate with the Contractor and Owner in order to have electric power available when required.

END OF SECTION


WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 26 05 19

Page 1 of 6

SECTION 26 05 19 WIRE AND CABLE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Work covered by this section includes furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials required to install, connect, and test all wire and cable, including splices, terminations, connectors, and accessories for a complete installation as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.

B. The Contractor’s attention is directed to the fact that all wires and cables are not necessarily shown on the Drawings, which are more or less schematic. However, the Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all wire and cable indicated or required to properly connect and place into operation all equipment and services requiring such wiring and/or cable.

C. Wire and cable colors shall match existing plant colors.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Samples of all wire and cable, clearly marked and long enough to show complete identification, shall be submitted to the office of the Engineer for approval prior to wiring installation.

B. No defective or damaged wire and cable shall be incorporated into the work.

1.3 SIZING OF CONDUCTORS

A. Unless otherwise required or directed by the Engineer, conductors shall be furnished in the sizes shown on the Drawings. No wire for lighting, power, or motor control circuits shall be smaller than No. 12 AWG. Motor control circuits carrying less than 8 amps may be No. 14 AWG. No wire for instrumentation and low-level signal transmission pairs shall be smaller than No. 16 AWG for single pairs or No. 20 AWG for bundled cable.

B. All wires and cables shall be of such size as to conform to the regulations of the current edition of the National Electrical Code for current carrying capacity.

C. Where the size of lighting wiring is not given on the Drawings, it shall be of such size that the voltage drop from the main panel to the lighting panel is not more than 1 percent, and the drop in the branch circuit is not more than 2 percent. The voltage drop in motor feeder, when the wire size is not specified, shall not be more than 3 percent at full load from the Motor Control Center to the motor terminal.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA

A. Complete shop drawings and engineering data shall be submitted in accordance with requirements of the Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.



Page 2 of 6

1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect all wire and cable in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements of the Section 01 30 00 of these Specifications.

B. Wire and cable shall be stored indoors in a dry and warm location and in its original packaging.

1.6 GUARANTEE

A. Provide a guarantee against defective materials and workmanship in accordance with requirements of the Section 00 72 00 of these Specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS - GENERAL

A. Conductors shall be solid or Class B concentric stranded, soft or annealed, uncoated copper free from kinks and defects in accordance with ASTM B 3 or B 8.

B. Conductors should have a conductivity not less than 97 percent.

C. The wire and cable shall have size, grade of insulation, voltage, and manufacturer’s “E-Number” permanently marked on the outer covering at not more than 2-foot intervals.

D. All wires shall conform to the latest Standards of the ASTM and ICEA and shall be tested for their full length by these Standards.

E. Insulation thickness shall be not less than that specified by the National Electrical Code.

F. All control circuit wiring and all wiring No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Lighting branch circuits No. 12 and No. 10 AWG may be solid. Wiring shall be stranded as follows: 1. No. 14 thru No. 2 AWG shall have a minimum of 7 strands. 2. No. 1 thru No. 4/0 AWG shall have a minimum of 19 strands. 3. No. 250 MCM thru No. 500 MCM shall have a minimum of 37 strands. 4. All circuits except control and instrumentation circuits shall have a separate grounding conductor

carried in the conduit.

2.2 CONDUCTORS FOR WIRE AND CABLE

A. XHHW - For service entrance, motor branch, and feeder circuits operating at 208, 240, and 480 volts, the conductors shall be single-conductor, cable rated, 600 volts. The single-conductor cable shall consist of uncoated annealed copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B 8 and insulated with corona, ozone, heat and moisture resisting cross-linked polyethylene insulation rated to withstand a copper temperature of 90 degrees C, Underwriter’s approved Type XHHW and shall be as manufactured by Southwire, General Cable Corporation, Okonite Company or equal.

B. THWN-2 - For general lighting and receptacle branch circuits operating at 115 volts, the conductor shall be single-conductor cable rated 600 volts. The single-conductor cable shall be uncoated annealed copper. No. 12 and No. 10 AWG may be solid, or stranded; larger cables shall be stranded per ASTM



Page 3 of 6

B 8 and insulated with polyvinyl chloride insulation rated to withstand a copper temperature of 75 degrees C, Underwriter’s approved Type THWN-2, and shall be as manufactured by Southwire, General Cable Corporation, Okonite Company, or equal.

C. For control circuits the conductors may be single or multi-conductor cable rated 600 volts. The conductors shall consist of uncoated annealed copper Class B stranded per ASTM B 8 and shall be No. 14 or No. 12 AWG, 7-strand, identified at each end using Brady wire markers B-500 vinyl cloth, Thomas and Betts “E-Z Code” wire markers, or equal. 1. Single-conductor cable shall have 45-mil-thick wall of cross-linked polyethylene or polyvinyl

chloride insulation, color red, to withstand a copper temperature of 90 degrees C, Underwriter’s Laboratories approved Type RHH-RHW, and shall be as manufactured by General Electric Company, Phelps Dodge, General Cable, Okonite, or equal.

2. Multi-conductor cable shall consist of single-conductor cables rated 600 volts and insulated to withstand a copper temperature of 90 C cabled together to form a cable assembly which is Underwriter’s Laboratories approved for installation in conduit. The core shall be color coded in accordance with ICEA, Method 1, with a plastic tape cover and a PVC or neoprene jacket overall.

D. Bare grounding conductor shall be Class A or B medium hard drawn, high conductivity bare copper, sized as shown on the Drawings. Conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller may be solid. Conductors No. 4 AWG and larger shall be stranded.

E. Flexible power cords shall be moisture-resistant, oil-resistant, neoprene-sheathed service cable designed for extra hard usage, Type SO, rated 600 volts at 90 degrees C continuous conductor temperature. Flexible heater cords shall be moisture-resistant, oil-resistant, neoprene and cotton sheathed service cable designed for extra hard usage, Type HSO, rated 600 volts at 90 degrees C continuous. Insulation shall be thermoplastic ethylene-propylene conforming to ICEA S-68-516. Neoprene shall conform to ASTM D 752. All flexible cords shall be UL listed.

2.3 INSTRUMENTATION AND THERMOCOUPLE EXTENSION WIRING

A. Instrumentation and low-level DC signal wiring shall be shielded, twisted pair conductors. Single twisted pairs shall consist of 2, Class B stranded, No. 16 AWG annealed copper conductors, 1 white and 1 black, with 15 mils of PVC insulation rated for 600 volts and 90 degrees C minimum continuous conductor temperature. Pairs shall be twisted to a lay of 1.5 to 2.5 inches. A 0.35 mil by 0.50 mil aluminum-mylar tape shield with stranded, bare No. 18 AWG, tinned copper drain wire in contact with the aluminum side of the shield shall be applied helically around the twisted pair. An overall jacket of 90 degrees C black PVC at least 30 mils in thickness shall be applied to the outside. Shield coverage shall be full 100 percent. All instrumentation wiring shall be UL listed.

B. Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable for RTD circuits: Stranded copper conductors, size #16 AWG. Insulate conductors individually with color-coded PVC. Provide shield for each triad and tinned-copper drain wire. Provide flame-retardant PVC outer jacket. Cable shall be rated 600 volts and 90 degrees C. Cable shall be designed for noise rejection for use in process control signals.

2.4 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A. Splices, taps and attachment of fittings and lugs shall be electrically and mechanically secure, and approved solderless lugs and connectors shall be used. Lugs and connectors shall be top quality product of Burndy, O-Z, Thomas and Betts, or equal manufacturer. Conductors shall not bind at



Page 4 of 6

bushings. Lugs shall be of the correct sizes for the conductors joined and strands shall not be cut from a conductor.

B. Splices, taps, and terminations of cable rated 600 volts and less requiring tape shall be half lap and at least 3 layers. Taping shall be neatly done and form a permanent insulation equal in mechanical and electrical strength to the insulation of the conductor. Taping shall be as follows: 1. Rubber Insulation

a. Inner Layer: Okonite Rubber Tape, 3M “Scotchfil” Electrical Insulation Putty, Plymouth “Plysafe” Tape, or equal.

b. Outer Layer: 3M “Scotch No. 88” Tape, Permacel No. 295 Tape, Slipknot Grey Tape, or equal.

c. Thermoplastic Insulation: 3M “Scotch No. 88” Tape, Permacel No. 295 Tape, Slipknot Grey Tape, or equal.

2. Terminations at motor junction boxes shall be sealed with 3M “Scotchkote” Electrical Coating over the outer layer of tape. All splices 600 volts and less in No. 8 AWG and larger sizes shall be made using approved bolted connectors properly taped as specified herein.

C. For No. 10 AWG and smaller branch circuit and fixture conductors operating at 277 volts or less, live spring pressure connectors rated for 600 volts may be used for splices and junctions. When installed in a fixture, connectors shall be rated for 1,000 volts.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All interconnecting wiring shall be installed in approved conduit or cable trays and connected as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all wiring shall be run in conduit.

B. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, wiring shall be run by the most direct route keeping overall circuit length to a minimum.

C. Instrumentation and low-level signal wiring shall not be located in the same conduit as motor wiring, feeder wiring, branch circuit wiring, or control wiring. Control wiring shall not be located in the same conduit as feeder wiring, or instrumentation wiring.

D. All control and circuit wiring in cabinets, boxes, gutters, etc. shall be neatly tied and held using nylon cable ties and mounting brackets.

E. After installation, conductors shall not have dents, scars, cuts, pressure indentations, abraded areas, etc.

F. Conductors 600 volts and below shall not be bent to a radius less than 12 times the cable diameter. Conductors above 600 volts shall not be bent to a radius of not less than 24 times the cable diameter.

G. Wiring run in metallic conduits shall be arranged such that there are an equal number of conductors of each phase in each conduit. Under no circumstances shall metallic conduits contain one single conductor or several conductors of only one phase. This requirement shall not apply to single, bare grounding conductors run in conduit to grounding rods or grids.



Page 5 of 6

H. Conductors may be coated with talc, soapstone, Ideal “Yellow 77” or “Wire Lube”, Electro-Compound “Y-ER EAS,” or equal, to facilitate pulling into raceways, but in no case may they be greased or coated with any substance injurious to conductor insulation and jacket. Pulling tension shall be exerted primarily on the strongest component of conductors, normally the metallic conductors themselves and not on the insulation jacket. When installing cable in conduit with pulling eye attached to copper conductor, the tension shall not exceed 0.008 pound per circular mil area of the conductor nor 5,000 pounds, whichever is smaller. When a basket grip is used over the outer jacket of the cable, the maximum pulling tension shall not exceed 0.008 pound per circular mil area of the conductor nor 1,000 pounds, whichever is smaller. In no case shall pulling tensions recommended by the wire manufacturer be exceeded. The maximum sidewall pressure exerted on the insulation and sheath at a cable bend shall not exceed 300 pounds per foot of conduit bending radius. Conductors shall not be pulled “through” any outlet, condulet or box. Separate “pulls” shall be made on each side of such point.

I. Unless otherwise specified, splices shall be made at outlet or conduit boxes, pull or junction boxes, manholes, or vaults. No splice shall be drawn into a conduit. Splices in wiring rated 600 volts and below shall be made with enough spare wire for 2 splices to be remade with the wire at the same location.

J. All instrumentation and thermocouple extension wire shields shall be grounded. Shields on individual circuits shall be electrically continuous and shall be grounded at only 1 point in the circuit. Shields on thermocouple extension wire shall be grounded at the thermocouple only.

K. Surge suppressors shall be installed with the shortest line lead possible, but in no case longer than 18 inches unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

L. Inside manholes, all cables are to have racks with insulator supports. Supports are to be within 6 inches of each side of a splice and spaced not farther than 3 feet apart.

M. All conductors are to be identified. Branch circuits, motor feeders, and lightning wiring shall be identified by color coding consistent with the existing facility. If the facility is new, the color code shall be as follows:

277/480V 120/208/240V

Phase A Brown Black

Phase B Orange Red

Phase C Yellow Blue

Neutral Grey White

Ground Bare Bare or Green

N. The color coding on No. 8 AWG and smaller conductors shall be continuous in length. No taping, painting or other means of coding will be acceptable. Conductors No. 6 AWG and larger and conductors operating above 600 volts shall be black with color coded tape visible at each point of access or view.

O. All circuits shall be identified at each termination and at all accessible locations such as manholes, hand holes, and pull-boxes. A circuit name shall be assigned based on the equipment at the load end



Page 6 of 6

of the circuit. Add a suffix letter if necessary, to make the circuit number unique. Utilize sleeves for conductor sizes #2 AWG and smaller, and marker plates attached with nylon tie cords for larger conductor sizes. Taped-on markers or markers relying on adhesives shall not be allowed.

P. Conductors used for temporary construction power shall not be used for the permanent installation, and the permanent conductor system shall not be used for construction power unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. Circuit protective devices shall never be temporarily bypassed.

Q. Cables shall be pulled and installed without splices. Splices shall only be made with the Engineer’s approval.

R. Apply fireproofing tape to cables in hand holes and manholes, and in other locations such as vaults, throughout their exposed length. Follow the tape manufacturer’s installation instructions closely.

3.2 TESTING

A. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of each individual exposed power cable #6 AWG and larger for physical damage, correct terminations in accordance with the Drawings, cable bends in accordance with bending radius requirements, proper circuit identification, proper lug type, tightness of bolted connections with proper torque level per NETA ATS, Table 10.12 or manufacturer’s specifications, and proper grounding.

B. Perform Insulation Resistance Testing of all conductors #6 AWG and larger with respect to ground and each adjacent conductor. Apply 1,000 volts dc for one minute on 600 volts insulated conductors in accordance with NETA. Minimum insulation resistance values shall not be less than 50 meg-ohms. Investigate all deviations between adjacent phases.

C. Perform Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections of all conductors #6 AWG and larger.

END OF SECTION


ELECTRIC BOXES SECTION 26 05 33

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 26 05 33

ELECTRIC BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. All boxes required throughout the electrical raceway system shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the requirements which follow.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Boxes shall be equal to Appleton, Crouse Hinds, Raco, or Steel City. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Outlet Boxes

1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS-1, UL 514; galvanized steel, with ½ inch male fixture studs where required.

2. Cast Boxes: Cast feralloy with galvanized or cadmium finish, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs for use with steel conduit, UL 514.

3. Floor Boxes: Full adjustable, steel, water and concrete tight equal to T&B model number 68 D.

4. Except as indicated otherwise on the drawings or in these specifications, all junction boxes or pull boxes 4-inch trade size or smaller in any dimension shall be galvanized malleable iron or acceptable equal cast ferrous metal for use with steel conduit.

B. Pull and Junction Boxes

1. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be as indicated on the drawings and as specified in these specifications. Where no type or size is indicated elsewhere for junction boxes or pull boxes, they shall be in accordance with the requirements of the NEC, Article 314, Paragraphs 28, 29, 40 and 41 for use on systems with a nominal rating of 600 volts and less, and Section IV for use on systems with a nominal rating of over 600 volts. a. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS-1; galvanized steel. Boxes larger than 12-inches

in any dimension are hinged enclosure. Equal to Hoffman Bulletin A-51. b. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA 250; Type 4, galvanized cast iron box and cover,

neoprene gasket, stainless steel cover screws, UL listed as raintight. Provide flat-



Page 2 of 3

flanged type for surface mounting and outside flange recessed cover type for underground use. Boxes for sidewalk or other traffic areas to have appropriate duty cover with non-skid finish.

c. Corrosion Resistant Boxes: UL 508 Type 4X, gasketed screw cover. For boxes larger than 12-inches in any dimension provide hinge on one side and stainless-steel toggle latches (equal to Hoffman A-FC412SS) on the other three sides. Equal to Type 304 stainless steel equal to Hoffman Bulletin A-51.

d. Floor Boxes: Floor boxes shall be cast iron with bolted covers. The boxes shall be approximately 12 inches square and 10 inches deep, and shall be located as shown on the drawings with the lid flush with the finished floor. Floor boxes shall be Neenah No. R-7517-DB or alternate acceptable to the Engineer.

2. Electrical enclosures, except junction boxes and pull boxes 4-inch trade size and smaller and other enclosures of cast metal, shall be constructed from steel plate reinforced as required to provide true surfaces and adequate support for devices mounted thereon.

3. Except as indicated otherwise in these specifications or on the drawings, all junction boxes and pull boxes larger than 4 inch trade size for use in indoor locations shall be sheet steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and those for use in outdoor or wet corrosive indoor locations shall be 316 stainless steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordination of Box Locations 1. Provide boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling and

equipment connections. 2. Box locations shown on the Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify box

locations prior to rough-in. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlet mounted above counters, benches, backsplashes, and other furnishings. Any outlet may be relocated by up to 10 feet before it is permanently installed without incurring additional cost.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Box Installation 1. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6-inch separation, except

provide minimum 24-inch separation in acoustic-rated walls. 2. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit comer only. Coordinate

masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. 3. Support boxes independently of conduits openings. 4. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together; do not use

sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. 5. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6-inches of

recessed luminaires to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. 6. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition

studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.



Page 3 of 3

7. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. Align adjacent devices at different elevations in one vertical line. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material.

8. Unless otherwise noted, use only cast outlet boxes. Galvanized steel boxes shall be used only in finished areas where they are completely concealed within walls or ceiling.

9. Conduit openings in boxes shall be made with a hole saw or shall be punched. Field locate holes in junction and pull boxes so as to afford the maximum bending radius for the conductors.

10. Boxes mounted on concrete shall be secured by self-drilling anchors. Mounting on steel shall be by drilled and tapped screw holes, or by special support channels welded to the steel, or by both. Boxes larger than 4-inch trade size shall be leveled and fastened to the mounting surface with not less than 1/4-inch air space between the enclosure and mounting surface. All mounting holes in the enclosure shall be used.

11. Except as prevented by the location of other work, all junction boxes and outlet boxes shall be centered on structures.

12. Label cover of junction boxes with circuit numbers of conductors in the box. 13. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings or in these specifications, electrical enclosures

except junction boxes and pull boxes 4-inch trade size and smaller, shall be as follows: Location Enclosure Type Indoor (Nonhazardous)

Dry Areas NEMA 1 Areas where moisture conditions are more severe than those for which NEMA 1 enclosures are intended NEMA 4 Wet, corrosive indoor areas NEMA 4X SS

Outdoor (Nonhazardous) NEMA 4X SS Class 1, Division 2 NEMA 7

END OF SECTION


CONDUIT SECTION 26 05 34

Page 1 of 7

SECTION 26 05 34

CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Work covered by this section includes furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials required to install electrical conduit and fittings as specified herein and/or shown on the Drawings.

B. The Contractor’s attention is called to the fact that all conduits and conduit fittings are not necessarily shown completely on the Drawings, as the Drawings are more or less schematic. However, the Contractor shall furnish and install all conduits and conduit fittings indicated or required for the proper connection and operation of the equipment.

C. In general, conduit shall be of the same type as used in the existing buildings. Contractor shall note that each building may contain different type of conduits (ie: HFS Building = PVC-40, Chemical Building = Rigid Aluminum).

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA

A. Shop drawings and engineering data shall be submitted in accordance with requirements of the Section 01 33 00 of these Specifications.

1.3 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect conduit and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements of the Section 01 60 00 of these Specifications. Conduit shall be stored aboveground and adequately supported.

1.4 GUARANTEE

A. Provide a guarantee against defective equipment and workmanship in accordance with requirements of the Section 00 72 14 Article 23 of these Specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all conduits shall be rigid metal. See the paragraph on Conduit Application for additional information.

B. Conduit terminations at electrical equipment such as electric motors, dry type transformers and heaters shall be made using liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit.

C. Damaged, dented, flattened, or kinked conduit shall not be used.



Page 2 of 7

2.2 RIGID METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid metal conduit shall be heavy wall, mild steel conduit conforming to ANSI C80.1 and Federal Specification WW-C-581, hot dip galvanized both inside and out. All conduits shall bear the approved stamp of the Underwriters Laboratories.

B. Rigid metal conduit shall be by Allied Tube & Conduit, Republic, or equal.

2.3 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Rigid nonmetallic conduit for voltages 600V and less shall be Schedule 40 heavy wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC) electrical conduit rated for 90 degrees C conductors and conforming to NEMA TC-2, Type EPC-40-PVC. It shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories in conformance with the National Electrical Code. Conduit fittings, elbows, and joint cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer as the conduit. Conduits shall be as manufactured by Carlon, Allied Tube and Conduit, Borg-Warner, or equal.

B. Rigid nonmetallic conduit for voltages higher than 600V shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) power duct rated for 90 degrees C conductors and conforming to NEMA TC-6, Type EB. Conduit fittings, elbows, and joint cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer as the conduit. Conduit shall be as manufactured by Carlon, Olin, or equal.

2.4 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT

A. Rigid aluminum conduit shall be manufactured of 6063 alloy in temper designation T-1. The fittings shall be of the same alloy.

B. All conduits shall bear the approved stamp of the Underwriters Laboratories and be manufactured to ANSI C80.5 and Federal Specification WW-C-540c.

C. Rigid Aluminum conduit shall be by Republic, Allied Tube and Conduit, or equal.

2.5 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Flexible conduit shall have an oil-resistant, liquid-tight jacket in combination with flexible metal reinforcing tubing and shall be designed for use with waterproof fittings. An integral ground wire shall be included. Flexible conduit shall be American Brass Sealtite Type UA as manufactured by Electric-Flex Company; Flexible Metallic Conduit as manufactured by Ideal Industries, Inc; or equal. Only Underwriter’s Laboratories approved fittings shall be used.

2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND BUSHINGS

A. Wherever conduits terminate in sheet steel boxes, double bonding type locknuts and bushings shall be used except when terminating in cast hubs. All bushings shall be insulated metallic type, equal to O. Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company, Type B; T & B Company, 1200 Series; Appleton Electric Company, Type BU-I; or equal.

B. Where conduits terminate in steel or cast NEMA 4 enclosures with no factory-installed threaded hubs, a threaded hub shall be installed equal to Myers Electric Products, Inc., Type ST or STG; Appleton Electric Company, Type HUB; Crouse-Hinds, Type HUB; or equal.



Page 3 of 7

C. All conduits terminating at motor control centers shall be suitably grounded to the motor control center ground bus using grounded type insulated bushings equal to O. Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company, BLB or IGB; Appleton, Type BIB; Thomas and Betts, 3800 Series; or equal.

D. Conduit expansion fittings shall be O. Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company, Type EX with Bonding Jumper, Type XJ; Appleton, Type SJ with Type XJB4 Bonding Jumpers; Crouse-Hinds, Type XJ with GC100 Bonding Jumper; or equal.

E. All outdoor conduit penetrations shall enter the enclosures, panels, junction boxes from the bottom side. Top and side penetrations are not permitted without the Engineer’s approval.

F. All outdoor conduit hubs shall be watertight Myers hubs.

2.7 CONDUIT BOXES

A. Exposed conduit boxes and pulling elbows shall be of die-cast, copper-free aluminum with threaded body and removable neoprene- gasketed cover. Conduit boxes shall conform to Federal Specification W-C-586a and shall be Crouse-Hinds “Condulet,” Appleton “Unilet Form 85,” or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4 inch aboveground and 1 inch below ground except where noted otherwise, and no conduit shall have more than 40 percent of its internal area occupied by conductors.

B. During construction all installed conduits shall be temporarily plugged, capped, or otherwise protected from the entrance of dust, trash, moisture, etc., and any conduits that may become clogged shall be replaced. No conductor shall be pulled in until all work that might cause damage to the conduit or conductors has been completed.

C. Conduit connections to sheet metal enclosures shall be securely fastened by double lock nuts inside and outside and shall have grounding bushings.

D. Conduit straps or brackets secured to concrete, brick, or masonry shall be by means of expansion bolts, toggle bolts, or approved drill anchors. No wood plugs will be permitted.

E. Conduits supported from building walls shall be installed with at least 1/4-inch clearance from the wall using pipe spacers equal to Appleton Electric Company, T & B Company, Steel City, or equal. Clamp back to prevent the accumulation of dirt and moisture behind the conduit.

F. Unless otherwise shown or specified, exposed rigid conduit shall be installed parallel or at right angles to structural members, surfaces, and building walls.

G. Two or more conduits in the same general routing shall be parallel with symmetrical bends.

H. Conduits shall be at least 12 inches from high temperature piping, ducts, and flues.



Page 4 of 7

I. Conduit installed horizontally shall allow headroom of at least 7 feet, except where it may be installed along structures, piping, equipment, or in other areas where headroom cannot be maintained because of other considerations.

J. Wherever necessary conduit boxes and pulling elbows shall be inserted in the lines. Gaskets shall be used to ensure a dust and watertight installation on all conduit boxes and fittings.

K. All bends and turns in conduits shall have a bend radius of not less than 6 times the internal diameter of the conduit. Bends shall be made using an approved bender to provide smooth bends with no kinks, dents, or flattening.

L. All concealed conduit shall be placed in walls, floors, ceilings, or slabs at the proper time in accordance with the progress of the work. The Contractor shall cooperate in every respect in meeting schedules and shall not delay the structural work unnecessarily. Conduits embedded in concrete shall be blocked and braced in place by use of adequate conduit separators to prevent displacement during pouring of the concrete. Where conduit interferes with structural steel, steel reinforcement, or in the opinion of the Engineer occupies too much space in the slab, the conduits shall be rearranged or installed exposed as directed by the Engineer. No additional payment will be made for such rearrangement of conduit whether or not additional conduit or fittings might be required.

M. Conduit wall seals with water stops shall be installed in outside walls below grade for all incoming or outgoing underground conduit emerging directly into the building area. The conduit wall seals shall have a pressure ring and sealing grommet to ensure a watertight installation.

N. Conduit expansion fittings and ground bonding jumpers shall be installed on all conduits passing through building expansion joints to provide movement in the conduit system.

O. Where groups of conduits terminate together or pass through floors, provide template to hold conduits in proper relation to each other and to building.

P. Conduits shall be plugged or capped with plastic caps during construction to protect threads and prevent entrance of dirt and water.

Q. Conduits shall be adequately supported at intervals as required by the National Electrical Code. One to two exposed conduits running parallel to each other may be supported by strap anchors, or 1-hole clamps (walls only). Exposed conduits larger than 2 inches or groups of more than 2 conduits run parallel shall be supported by means of minimum 12-gauge, slotted steel channels fitted with 2-piece, bolted pipe clamps. All conduit supports, clamps, straps and brackets shall be stainless steel for corrosion resistance.

R. Runs of conduit shall not contain more than four 90-degree bends (360-degrees total) between conduit boxes panelboards, or terminations. In general, and to the extent practical length of conduit runs between conduit boxes or similar means of access shall not exceed 100 feet.

S. Exposed service entrance conduits and main feeder conduits shall be identified using stenciled letters at intervals not to exceed 20 feet. Size of letters shall be equal to one-half the diameter of the conduit or 2 inches, whichever is less.

T. In Class 1, Division 2 areas, the contractor is responsible for installing seal-off fittings as required by Articles 500, 501, and 502 of the National Electric Code. The drawings do not show seal off



Page 5 of 7

fittings and it is the contractor’s responsibility to locate and install the seal-offs based on field routing of the conduit.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RIGID METAL CONDUIT

A. Terminations and connections of rigid metal conduit shall be threaded. Conduits shall be reamed free of burrs and terminated with insulated metallic conduit bushings.

B. Conduit threads shall be coated with a petroleum base corrosion-inhibitor with low electrical contact resistance before assembly equal to Burndy Engineering Company, Inc., Penetrax “A” or equal screw thread lubricant (zinc-petroleum or zinc-chromate compounds are permissible).

C. All conduits shall be suitably grounded to the plant ground grid using grounded type insulated bushings, O. Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company, Type BLG or IGB, T & B Company, Appleton Electric Company, or equal.

D. Conduit across structural joints where structural movement is allowed shall have bonded, weathertight expansion and deflection fitting the same size as the conduit.

E. Support spacing for conduits 1 inch and smaller shall not exceed 6 feet, and conduits 1¼ inches and larger shall not exceed 10 feet. Supports shall be as specified under basic electrical materials and methods. Conduits 1½-inch and smaller may be supported by 1-hole conduit straps and 2 inches and larger shall be supported by 2-hole conduit straps. Conduit racks shall be as manufactured by Unistrut, Kindorf, or equal. Conduit racks shall be 316 stainless steel.

F. Conduit joints shall be made up tight using a pipe wrench. Channel lock pliers will not be permitted, and unions shall be used as necessary to aid in the installation. Conduits shall be cut square and the ends reamed smooth after threading to prevent injury to conductors. Conduit joints in concrete or exposed to weather or damp locations shall be drawn up tight and coated with insulating paint before casting in concrete or painting exposed conduit system.

G. Plastic-coated rigid metal conduit and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations. Any damage to the plastic coating shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. The manufacturer shall certify the installers before installation can be started.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Field bending of polyvinyl chloride conduit shall be made with appropriate equipment. No torches or flame-type devices shall be used.

B. When joints are to be made with polyvinyl chloride conduit, the conduit shall be cut with a fine-tooth saw and deburred. Conduit ends shall be wiped clean of dust, dirt, and shavings and shall be dry. Solvent cement shall be applied to bond the joint. The joint should be watertight.

C. Polyvinyl chloride conduit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ specifications and recommendations.



Page 6 of 7

3.4 INSTALLATION OF LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Terminations at motors shall be made with flexible liquid-tight metal conduit from conduit stub to terminal box; flexible connection shall be made as short as possible. Flexible conduit shall be Type UA, black. Underwriter’s Laboratories approved flexible liquid-tight conduit connectors shall be as manufactured by Thomas and Betts Company, Appleton Electric Company, or equal.

B. Uncoated flexible metal conduit may be used for short connections between junction boxes and lighting fixtures or speakers installed in suspending ceiling systems. Flexible metal conduit shall be connected using Underwriters Laboratories approved grounding connectors.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. All underground conduits shall be concrete-encased unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. No conduit shall be concealed or encased until the Engineer has inspected the conduit for proper installation and accurate placement.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all excavating, draining trenches, forming of duct assembly and protective concrete envelope, backfilling, and removal of excess earth.

C. Underground conduit shall be installed with a minimum 3-inch per 100-foot downward slope for drainage. Drains shall be provided at all low points.

D. Bends and turns shall be made using long sweeps. Ninety-degree bends will be used only where required and shall be kept at a minimum.

E. Where rigid nonmetallic conduits emerge from underground, an adapter from rigid nonmetallic conduit to rigid metal conduit shall be installed and all exposed conduit shall be rigid metal conduit.

F. All rigid metal conduit risers shall be protected with 2 coats of a Bitumastic compound before concrete is poured from a point 12 inches below grade to a point not less than 6 inches above grade or surface of concrete. All stub-ups shall extend upward with one length of rigid metal conduit until after concrete is poured to assure vertical alignment.

G. Conduits shall be encased in concrete with 3-inch minimum concrete cover all around.

H. Concrete for concrete encasement shall be Class B concrete conforming to requirements of the section entitled “Cast-In-Place Concrete,” of these Specifications. Longitudinal and lateral steel reinforcement shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.

I. All underground conduit runs for voltages less than 600 volts shall be at least 24 inches below grade and shall have a minimum conduit separation of 4 inches.

J. All underground conduit runs for voltages over 600 volts shall be at least 36 inches below grade and shall have a minimum conduit separation of 4 inches. Conduit shall have a minimum 4-inch concrete cover on all sides.

K. All underground conduit runs shall be rodded, and a mandrel drawn through followed by a swab to clean out any obstructions that may cause cable abrasions. The mandrel shall be 12 inches in length and the diameter ½ inch less than the inside diameter of the conduit.



Page 7 of 7

L. All underground conduit runs shall be marked by a strip of permanently colored red polyethylene tape, 0.004-inch-thick and 6 inches wide, buried above the conduit and 6 inches below finished grade.

M. All spare conduits shall be provided with permanent waterproof caps at stub-ups and shall be furnished with a No. 8 aluminum pulling wire. Waterproof raceway tags shall be attached to the pulling cords, at each end and at each intermediate pulling point. The raceway tags shall identify the origin and destination of the conduit.

3.6 CONDUIT APPLICATION

A. Install the following conduit types, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 1. Outdoors, Exposed (Not Buried): Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit, UNO 2. Main Chemical Building Indoors

a. Dry Areas Aluminum Rigid Steel Conduit b. Wet Areas Aluminum Rigid Steel Conduit

3. Underground (Under Slabs-on-Grade, Encased or Embedded in Concrete) a. PVC Schedule 40

4. HFS Building Indoors a. Dry Areas PVC Schedule-40 b. Wet Areas PVC Schedule-40

5. Other Buildings a. Match Existing Conduit

END OF SECTION


REMOTE MONITORING WORKSTATIONS

SECTION 01 50 00 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 28 05 17


PART 1 GENERAL


Workstations for Network Video Recorders used within Surveillance Systems.

Provide two Workstations – One at the Water Treatment Plant and one at the Raw Water Intake

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

Section 28 05 17 – Remote Monitoring Workstations

Section 28 05 19 – Network Monitoring Workstations

Section 28 21 13 – Multisensor Network Cameras

Section 28 21 14 – IP Cameras

Section 28 21 15 – IP PTZ Cameras

Section 28 21 16 – Outdoor Dome Cameras

Section 28 23 00 – Video Management Systems

Section 28 23 01 – Camera BOM

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Coordination: 1. Coordinate with Owner or Owner’s representative regarding network configuration

and estimated throughput utilization prior to performing network connections.

Sequencing / Scheduling: Provide to Owner or Owner’s representative a schedule and list of participants required to attend coordination and progress update meetings. 1. Owner representative(s) for Facilities Management, Information Technology (IT)

Services, and Security Management. 2. General Contractor. 3. Project Manager. 4. Manufacturer’s Representative. 5. Project Engineer.




6. Security Consultant.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.

Product Data: Manufacturer's product information and data sheets for each product specified in this section, including: 1. Substrate preparation instructions and recommendations 2. Installation means and methods. 3. Recommendations and requirements for proper storage and handling.

Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Manufacturer’s approved shop drawings detailing the section and elevation

views of each product to be installed. 2. Coordinate with locations listed on Contract Drawings.

Warranty Information: 1. Submit confirmation and details of manufacturer’s warranty, extended warranty, and

replacement policies.

System Support Resources: 1. Submit a list of available manufacturers providing fee based professional services

available to the Contractor or Owner, including but not limited to the following: a. Training. b. Installation. c. Commissioning. d. Remote diagnostics and integration with 3rd party software and hardware

systems.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Supply licensing and registration information for all software, hardware, firmware, operational, and administrative licenses.

Supply network configuration backup files, restoration application and instructions.


Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Minimum of 5 years in business. 2. Installers:

a. Performs Network Video Recorder (NVR) installation, configuration, setup, programming and related work employing authorized integrators/electronic technicians certified by manufacturer.

b. Certification for authorized integrators/electronic technicians shall include, at a minimum, installation and service of equipment provided.




1.7 WARRANTY

Manufacturer Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty covering parts and labor costs to repair or replace part that fail to perform. 1. Warranty Period: Parts and labor warranty for 36 months from date of Substantial

Completion or date of purchase, whichever comes first. 2. Service During Warranty: Provide direct support to Owner via phone and email,

including access to training and education in the form of documents, videos and other materials via the internet.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Basis of Design Manufacturer: Avigilon. 1. Address: 555 Robson St., Vancouver, BC, V6B 1A6, Canada. 2. Phone: (888) 281-5182. 3. Website: www.avigilon.com.

Manufacturer List: 1. Manufacturer:

Substitution Limitations: 1. Submit substitution requests in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2. Single manufacturer will provide, from a single source, a fully integrated surveillance

system consisting of network video recorders and the following components: a. IP Video Cameras. b. Video Management System Equipment. c. Video Surveillance Positioning Equipment. d. Video Surveillance Sensors.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

System: 1. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 10. 2. Memory: No less than 8 GB DDR4 RAM. 3. Network Interface: At least one (1) Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (1000Base-T).

Displays: 1. Monitor Interfaces: Support no less than two (2) monitors.

a. mini-DisplayPort (mDP). b. HDMI (with supplied cabling).

2. Resolution: Up to 3840 x 2160 (4K).




3. Refresh Rate: Up to 60Hz.

Electrical Power: 1. Input: 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, auto-switching. 2. Supply: Single, non-redundant. 3. Maximum Power Consumption: No greater than 290W.

Operational Range: 1. Temperature: 10 degrees C to 35 degrees C [50F to 95F]. 2. Relative Humidity: 20–80 percent (non-condensing). 3. Vibration: Between 5 Hz and 350 Hz at 0.0002 G²/HzS. 4. Shock: 40 G +/- 5 percent with pulse duration of 2 msec +/- 10 percent. 5. Altitude: -15.2 m to 3048 m (-50 ft to 10,000 ft).

System Certifications: 1. UL and cUL certification marks for Canada/USA. 2. CE certification mark for European Union. 3. RCM certification mark for Australia. 4. WEEE mark for European Union.

2.3 REMOTE MONITORING WORKSTATIONS

4 Monitor Professional High-Performance Remote Monitoring Workstation: 1. Basis of Design Product: Model HD-RMWS4-4MN, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:

a. Performance at maximum quality in the ACC Client software using (4) 1080p displays: 1) Thirteen (13) 5MP video streams at 13 fps. 2) Eleven (11) 2MP video streams at 30 fps. 3) Six (6) 6MP Fisheye video streams at 30 fps. 4) Five (5) 8MP H.265 video streams at 10 fps.

b. Performance: When displayed at maximum quality in the ACC Client software at 200 percent DPI scaling using (4) 4K displays: 1) Twelve (12) 5MP video streams at 13 fps. 2) Ten (10) 2MP video streams at 30 fps. 3) Six (6) 6MP Fisheye video streams at 30 fps. 4) Five (5) 8MP H.265 video streams at 10 fps.

c. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB. d. Processor: Intel® Core™ i7. e. Memory: 8 GB DDR4 RAM. f. Network Interface: 2 Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (1000Base-T). g. Video Outputs: 4 active (4 × mDP). h. Optical Drive: DVD-RW.

2 Monitor Professional High-Performance Remote Monitoring Workstation.




1. Basis of Design Product: Model HD-RMWS3-2MN, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:

a. Performance at maximum quality in the Client software using (2) 1080p displays: 1) Seven (7) 5MP video streams at 13 fps. 2) Six (6) 2MP video streams at 30 fps. 3) Three (3) 6MP Fisheye video streams at 30 fps. 4) Three (3) 8MP H.265 video streams at 10 fps.

b. Performance: When displayed at maximum quality in the Client software at 200 percent DPI scaling using (2) 4K displays: 1) Six (6) 5MP video streams at 13 fps. 2) Five (5) 2MP video streams at 30 fps. 3) Three (3) 6MP Fisheye video streams at 30 fps. 4) Three (3) 8MP H.265 video streams at 10 fps.

c. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise. d. Processor: 6th Gen Intel® Core™ i5. e. Memory: 8 GB DDR4 RAM. f. Network Interface: Two (2) 1 Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (1000Base-T). g. Video Outputs: Two (2) active Mini-DisplayPort (mDP). h. Optical Drive: DVD-RW.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

Human Interface Devices (HID): 1. USB Keyboard. 2. USB Mouse.

Cabling: 1. Power Cord; one (1) per workstation. 2. Mini-DisplayPort (mDP) to HDMI adapters; four (4) per workstation. 1. Power Cord; one (1) per workstation. 2. Mini-DisplayPort (mDP) to HDMI adapters; two (2) per workstation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Verification of Conditions: Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

Evaluation and Assessment: If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION




Surface Preparation: Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

Install all products in this section following the product manufacturer’s published installation and application manuals and guidelines.

3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP

Test equipment and configure system in accordance with instructions provided by the manufacturer prior to installation.

Configure equipment requiring users to log on using a password with user/site-specific credentials. Default passwords are not acceptable and must be configured prior to project closeout.

Provide products with the latest and most up-to-date firmware by the manufacturer or provide firmware of a version specified by the provider of the Video Management Application (VMA) or Network Video Recorder (NVR).

3.5 ADJUSTING

Fine Tuning: Perform field software changes after initial programming session to “fine tune” operating parameters and sequence of operations based on any revisions to Owner’s operating requirements.

3.6 CLOSEOUT

Demonstration: 1. Demonstrate administration and operation of devices described by this section. 2. Demonstrate how to authorize users and applications to operate and configure installed

devices. 3. Demonstrate how an authorized user can gain access to and make changes to

configuration. 4. Demonstrate how to operate functionality configured for this project as defined by

configuration punch list.

END OF SECTION


NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS


SECTION 28 05 19


PART 1 GENERAL


Network Video Recorders for Surveillance Systems.

Recorder shall monitor all cameras at the Water Treatment Plant and all cameras at the Raw Water Intake














Services, and Security Management. 2. General Contractor. 3. Project Manager. 4. Manufacturer’s Representative. 5. Project Engineer.




6. Security Consultant.










systems.











1.7 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




system consisting of network video recorders and the following components: a. IP Video Cameras. b. Video Management System Interfaces. c. Video Surveillance Positioning Equipment. d. Video Surveillance Sensors.


Throughput: NVR system must be capable of managing a combined 1800 Mbps of total throughput with handling for simultaneous recording, playback and live streaming.

Search Capacity: System must be capable of supporting up to one hundred (100) cameras.

Storage Capacity: System must be capable of storing up to 180TB raw or 157TB when configured as RAID 6.

Expansion: System must be configured to be capable of future expansion and scaling.




Mounting: Standard server enclosure (rack) mounting, requiring no greater than a 2U configuration.

Electrical Power: 1. Input: 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, auto-switching. 2. Supply: Appliance must be configurable for multiple power supplies that may be

replaced without the need to power down (hot-swappable). 3. Maximum Power Consumption: No greater than 2200W.

System Certifications: 1. UL and cUL certification marks for Canada/USA. 2. CE certification mark for European Union. 3. RCM certification mark for Australia. 4. WEEE mark for European Union. 5. Electromagnetic Emissions Certifications:

a. FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B. b. ICES-003 Class B. c. EN 55032 Class B. d. EN 61000-6-3. e. EN 61000-3-2. f. EN 61000-3-3.

6. Electromagnetic Immunity Standards: a. EN 55024. b. EN 61000-6-1. c. EN 50130-4.

7. Safety Standards: a. UL/CSA/IEC/EN 60950-1.

2.3 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS

Basis of Design Product: Avigilon HD NVR4 Premium.

System Design: 1. Drive Configuration:

a. Video Storage: Up to 18 x large form factor near-line SAS hard disk drives, hot-swappable, RAID 6.

b. Operating System: (2) M.2 SSD drives, RAID 1. 2. Storage Capacity: 64 TB when configured with RAID 6. 3. Storage Capacity: 96 TB when configured with RAID 6. 4. Storage Capacity: 128 TB when configured with RAID 6. 5. Storage Capacity: 157 TB when configured with RAID 6. 6. Operating System: Microsoft Windows Server 2016. 7. Processor: Intel Xeon. 8. RAM: 32GB DDR4. 9. Networking: (2) 10GB Ethernet SFP+ ports and (2) 1GB Ethernet RJ-45 ports

(1000Base-T).




10. Power Supply: (2) 80 plus Titanium power supplies configured to allow swapping without the need to power down.

11. Video Output: VGA. 12. Mounting: 2U rack mount chassis. 13. Operational Range:

a. Temperature: 10 degrees C to 35 degrees C [50F to 95F]. b. Relative Humidity: 10–80 percent (non-condensing). c. Altitude: 3048 meters [10,000 ft].

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION


3.3 INSTALLATION


3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP




3.5 ADJUSTING





3.6 CLOSEOUT





END OF SECTION


NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER SECTION 28 05 19.15

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 28 05 19.15 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS

PART 1 GENERAL


Network Video Recorders for Surveillance Systems.


Section 28 21 11 - IP Cameras.

Section 28 23 13 - Video Management System Interfaces.





Services, and Security Management. 2. General Contractor. 3. Project Manager. 4. Manufacturer’s Representative. 5. Project Architect. 6. Project Engineer. 7. Security Consultant.






Warranty Information:



Page 2 of 5

1. Submit confirmation and details of manufacturer’s warranty, extended warranty, and replacement policies.



systems.








1.7 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Basis of Design Manufacturer: Avigilon. 1. Address: 555 Robson St., Vancouver, BC, V6B 1A6, Canada. 2. Phone: (888) 281-5182.



Page 3 of 5

3. Website: www.avigilon.com.



system consisting of network video recorders and the following components: a. IP Video Cameras. b. Video Management System Interfaces. c. Video Surveillance Positioning Equipment. d. Video Surveillance Sensors.


Throughput: NVR system must be capable of managing a combined 900 Mbps of total throughput with handling for simultaneous recording, playback and live streaming.

Search Capacity: System must be capable of supporting up to eighty (80) cameras.

Storage Capacity: System must be capable of storing up to 64TB raw or 48 TB when configured as RAID 6.

Expansion: System must be configured to be capable of future expansion and scaling.

Mounting: Standard server enclosure (rack) mounting, requiring no greater than a 2U configuration.

Electrical Power: 1. Input: 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, auto-switching. 2. Supply: Appliance must be configurable for multiple power supplies that may be

replaced without the need to power down (hot-swappable). 3. Maximum Power Consumption: No greater than 750W.

System Certifications: 1. UL and cUL certification marks for Canada/USA. 2. CE certification mark for European Union. 3. RCM certification mark for Australia. 4. WEEE mark for European Union. 5. Electromagnetic Emissions Certifications:

a. FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B. b. ICES-003 Class B. c. EN 55032 Class B. d. EN 61000-6-3. e. EN 61000-3-2. f. EN 61000-3-3.

6. Electromagnetic Immunity Standards:



Page 4 of 5

a. EN 55024. b. EN 61000-6-1. c. EN 50130-4.

7. Safety Standards: a. UL/CSA/IEC/EN 60950-1.

2.3 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS

Basis of Design Product: Avigilon HD NVR4 Standard.

System: 1. Drive Configuration:

a. Up to 8 large form factor hard disk drives, hot-swappable, RAID 6. b. Operating System: (2) M.2 SSD drives, RAID 1.

2. Storage Capacity: 16 TB when configured with RAID 6. 3. Storage Capacity: 24 TB when configured with RAID 6. 4. Storage Capacity: 32 TB when configured with RAID 6. 5. Storage Capacity: 48 TB when configured with RAID 6. 6. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB. 7. Processor: Intel Xeon. 8. RAM: 16GB DDR4. 9. Networking: (4) 1 GB Ethernet RJ-45 ports (1000Base-T) and (2) 10GB Ethernet

SFP+ ports. 10. Power Supply: (1) 80 plus Titanium power supply. 11. Power Supply: (2) 80 plus Titanium power supplies configured to allow swapping

without the need to power down. 12. Video Output: VGA. 13. Mounting: 2U rack mount chassis.

Operational Range: 1. Temperature: 10 degrees C to 35 degrees C [50F to 95F]. 2. Relative Humidity: 10–80 percent (non-condensing). 3. Altitude: 3048 meters [10,000 ft].

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION



Page 5 of 5


3.3 INSTALLATION


3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP




3.5 ADJUSTING


3.6 CLOSEOUT





END OF SECTION


AUDIO-VIDEO INTERCOM SECTION 28 15 23.17

Page 1 of 7

SECTION 28 15 23.17 AUDIO-VIDEO INTERCOMS

PART 1 GENERAL


Video Intercoms.

Relays for Video Intercoms.


Section 28 23 11 - Video Management System Analytics.


Section 28 25 00 - Video Surveillance Positioning Equipment.


Coordination: Coordinate with Owner or Owner’s representative regarding intercom network configuration and estimated bandwidth utilization prior to performing network connections.







views of each product to be installed.



Page 2 of 7

2. Coordinate with locations listed on Contract Drawings.

Warranty Information: Submit confirmation and details of manufacturer’s warranty, extended warranty, and replacement policies.

System Support Resources: Submit a list of available manufacturers providing fee based professional services available to the Contractor or Owner, including but not limited to the following: 1. Training. 2. Installation. 3. Commissioning. 4. Remote diagnostics and integration with 3rd party software and hardware systems.




1.6 MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

Spare Parts: All Spare Parts must be delivered to the owner in their original sealed packaging. Clearly label with “SPARE: DO NOT REMOVE”, and include manufacturer part numbers, and date of delivery to Owner. Store all spare parts in an environment and condition recommended by the manufacturer. 1. One spare for each 4 devices. 2. Provide spare components as noted in the coordinating schedule for work listed in this

section.



a. Performs camera installation, configuration, setup, programming and related work employing authorized integrators/electronic technicians certified by manufacturer.


1.8 WARRANTY


Completion or date of purchase, whichever comes first.



Page 3 of 7

2. Service During Warranty: Provide direct support to Owner via phone and email, including access to training and education in the form of documents, videos and other materials via the internet.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




system consisting of video intercoms and the following components: a. Video Management System Analytics. b. Video Management System Interfaces. c. Video Surveillance Positioning Equipment. d. Video Surveillance Sensors.

2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

System Design: 1. Video monitoring system must be tightly integrated using application programming

interfaces and software development kits. 2. All systems must function autonomously during a failure of one or more of the related

sections. 3. Intercoms in this section must be capable of bi-directional communication. 4. Video monitoring system to be interfaced through digital communication protocols

including but not limited to ASCII or Hexadecimal Data Transmissions.

System Certifications: 1. UL and cUL certification marks for Canada/USA. 2. CE certification mark for European Union. 3. RCM certification mark for Australia.

Safety Standards: 1. UL/CSA/IEC/EN62368-1.

Electromagnetic Emissions Standards: 1. FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B. 2. ICES-003 Class B.



Page 4 of 7

3. EN 55032 Class B. 4. EN 61000-6-3. 5. EN 61000-3-2. 6. EN 61000-3-3.

Electromagnetic Emissions Standards: 1. EN 55024. 2. EN 61000-6-1. 3. EN 50130-4.


General Requirements: Provide intercoms capable of both streaming and locally storing synchronized video and audio data in a tamper and weather resistant housing suitable for both indoor and outdoor applications.

Video Requirements: Provide intercoms with a minimum 3 Megapixel, wide-angle fisheye lens with no less than a 170-degree horizontal field of view. Units must include integrated Infrared LEDs to provide uniform illumination at 0 lux. 1. Performance Criteria:

a. Lens: 1.83mm, F2.4, IR Corrected. b. Viewing Angle: 170 degrees horizontal / 120 degrees vertical. c. Image Sensor: 1/2.8-inch Progressive Scan CMOS. d. Aspect Ratio: 4:3 e. Imaging Rate (Framerate): 30 fps.

2. Control Criteria: a. Image Compression: H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC), Motion JPEG. b. Video Compression: H.264 / MJPEG / HDSM SmartCodec technology. c. Motion Detection Method: Pixel. d. Electronic Shutter Control: Both automatic and manual.

1) Effective Range: 1/6 to 1/8000 second. e. Privacy Zones: Up to 64 zones.

Audio Requirements: Provide intercoms with bi-directional communication which include noise reduction and echo-cancellation. 1. Performance Criteria:

a. Audio Compression: Opus, G.711. b. Microphone/Speaker: Built-in with hardware disabling. c. Noise Reduction and echo cancellation.

Network Requirements: Provide Intercoms having a single network connection for video and audio using Power over Ethernet (PoE). Units must be capable of granting door access and controlling electronic door access hardware via video management software. 1. Networking Type: 100BASE-TX. 2. Cabling: Minimum CAT5 cable with RJ45 connections. 3. ONVIF compliant with version 1.02, 2.00, Profile S.



Page 5 of 7

Standards: 1. IEEE 802.3af (Power over Ethernet). 2. IEEE 802.1X (Authentication). 3. IPv4 (RFC 791).

Protocol Support Requirements: Provide intercoms that incorporate support for at least the following: 1. IPv4. 2. HTTP. 3. HTTPS. 4. SOAP. 5. DNS. 6. NTP. 7. RSTP. 8. RTCP. 9. RTP. 10. TCP. 11. UDP. 12. IGMP. 13. ICMP. 14. DHCP. 15. Zeroconf. 16. ARP. 17. SNMP v2c. 18. SNMP v3.

Installation and Maintenance Requirements: Provide intercoms with the following installation and maintenance requirements: 1. Allow firmware updates via network. 2. Store customer-specific settings in a non-volatile memory which cannot be lost during

power cuts or soft reset. 3. Provide Microsoft Windows based management software, allowing camera

configuration, upgrade of firmware, and backup of individual camera configurations.

2.4 VIDEO INTERCOMS

Basis of Design Product: H4 Video Intercom with 3 MP fisheye camera.

Performance: 1. Native Resolution: 2048x1536. 2. Frame Rate: 30fps. 3. Aspect Ratio: 4:3. 4. 1/2.8" Progressive Scan CMOS Mounting Options:

a. Flush Mount with coordinating adapter. b. Recessed Mount.

5. Operational Range: a. Temperature: -40 °C to 60 °C (-40 °F to 140 °F).



Page 6 of 7

b. Relative Humidity: 0–95 percent (non-condensing).

2.5 SAFETY RELAYS FOR VIDEO INTERCOMS

Basis of Design Product: Safety Relay for H4 Video Intercom.

Performance: 1. Power Source:

a. External 12V-24V DC power supply. b. PoE: IEEE802.3af Class 3 compliant VDC: 12V +/- 10 percent, 10W min.

2. Outputs: Normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) relay contacts rated at 2A. 3. Operational Range:

a. Mounting Location: Relay designed for indoor placement. b. Temperature: -40 degrees C to +50 degrees C [-40 F to +122 F]. c. Relative Humidity: 5–85 percent (non-condensing).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION


3.3 INSTALLATION


3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP


Review configurable features of the device with the Owner’s Representative and establish a punch list for standard, device specific, location specific and VMA/NVR specific configuration of device(s). 1. Program and configure devices in accordance with this punch list so no additional

programming is required for operation by the user.



Page 7 of 7



3.5 ADJUSTING


3.6 CLOSEOUT





License Assignment: 1. Register software, hardware, firmware, operational or administrative licenses

necessary for to operate or administer devices to Owner. 2. Deliver to Owner’s Representative proof of license registration from product

manufacturer.

Device Configuration Backup: 1. Using manufacturer’s backup software tool or VMA/NVR, perform a full system

back-up at completion of initial programming. 2. Deliver configuration backup files, restoration application and instructions detailing

for restoration of back-up configuration.

END OF SECTION


MULTISENSOR NETWORK CAMERAS SECTION 28 21 13

Page 1 of 15

SECTION 28 21 13

MULTISENSOR NETWORK CAMERAS

PART 1 GENERAL


Multiple Sensor, Dome-Type Network cameras for video surveillance.











Coordination: 1. Coordinate with Owner or Owner’s representative regarding camera network

configuration and estimated bandwidth utilization prior to performing network connections.


Services, and Security Management. 2. General Contractor. 3. Project Manager. 4. Manufacturer’s Representative. 5. Project Engineer. 6. Security Consultant.





Page 2 of 15








systems.






section.


Qualifications - Manufacturers: Manufacturer(s) suppling products noted in this section must have a minimum of 5 years in business.

Qualifications - Installers: 1. Installer must be licensed to install video surveillance and security equipment as

required by authority having jurisdiction.



Page 3 of 15

2. Installer must be capable of providing references that will attest to successful completion of projects of similar scope as the work noted in this section.

3. Installer must be certified by the manufacturer and be up to date with all training required to maintain good standing.

Mock-Ups: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of installer’s workmanship. 1. Do not proceed with remaining Work until workmanship is approved by Architect. 2. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1.8 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




system consisting of network cameras and the following components: a. Video Management System Analytics. b. Video Management System Interfaces. c. Video Surveillance Positioning Equipment. d. Video Surveillance Sensors.

2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

System Design: 1. All cameras in this section must be designed in a modular fashion such that mounts,

mounting components and hardware are universal and not integrated directly with the camera itself.

2. Video monitoring system must be tightly integrated using application programming interfaces and software development kits.



Page 4 of 15

3. All systems must be capable of functioning autonomously during a failure of one or more of the related sections.

4. Cameras in this section must be capable of bi-directional communication. 5. Video monitoring system to be interfaced through digital communication protocols


System Certifications: 1. UL and cUL certification marks for Canada/USA.CE certification mark for European

Union. 2. ROHS mark for European Union. 3. RCM certification mark for Australia. 4. EAC certification mark for Customs Union (Russia, Belarus, Kazakhstan).

Safety Standards: 1. UL/CSA/IEC/EN 60950-1.

Electromagnetic Emissions Standards: 1. FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B. 2. ICES-003 Class B. 3. EN 55032 Class B. 4. EN 61000-6-3. 5. EN 61000-3-2. 6. EN 61000-3-3.

Electromagnetic Emissions Standards: 1. EN 55024. 2. EN 61000-6-1.


Standards: 1. Video Standards: H.264 / H.265 / MJPEG / HDSM SmartCodec technology. 2. Image Standards: MPEG-4 - ISO/IEC 14496-10 AVC (H.264). 3. Networking Standards:

a. IEEE 802.3af (Power over Ethernet). b. IEEE 802.1X (Authentication). c. IPv4 (RFC 791). d. IPv6.

Video Requirements: 1. Provide cameras capable of simultaneously delivering at least two individual video

streams, for use when connecting to the Video Management Software for recording and live viewing.

2. Provide cameras with a primary stream capable of supporting the video resolution and aspect ratio and capable of generating the image framerates noted in this section.

3. By generating a secondary and/or tertiary stream at fractional resolutions of the primary stream, Video device must support HDSM-High Definition Stream Management and/or Dynamic Bandwidth Management.



Page 5 of 15

Encoding Requirements: 1. Support compression and image quality settings from 1 to 20 to configure bandwidth

utilized by the camera and desired image response. Provide user configuration of compression quality and image rate per camera.

2. Provide independently configured simultaneous H.264, H.265 and Motion JPEG streams (multi-stream).

3. Support Motion JPEG encoding in a selectable range from 1 up to 12 frames per second based on resolution configured.

4. Support H.265 encoding in a selectable range from 1 up to 12 frames per second based on resolution configured.

5. Support Variable Bit Rate (VBR) in H.265 with a configurable maximum bit rate threshold.

6. Provide user configuration of compression format, compression quality, maximum bit rate, key frame interval, and image rate per camera.

7. Support motion compensation and motion vector during motion estimation in H.264 and H.265, able to maintain frame rate, regardless of scene complexity, when bandwidth is capped at 17.5mbps at 12 FPS.

8. Support G.711 PCM 8kHz audio compression.

Transmission Requirements: 1. Provide cameras that support the following when connecting to a VMS:

a. Dynamic Bandwidth Management. b. High Definition Stream Management.

2. Cameras must Transmit two distinct video streams: a. Primary Stream: Supports up to full resolution and prescribed frame rate. b. Secondary Stream: Supports fractional resolution and mirrors the frame rate and

aspect ratio of the primary stream at a maximum 0.3MP - 640x480 (4:3) / 768x432 (16:9).

3. Cameras must Transmit three distinct video streams: a. Primary Stream: Supports up to full resolution and prescribed frame rate. b. Second Stream: Supports fractional resolution and mirrors the frame rate and

aspect ratio of the primary stream at a maximum 1.3MP – 1280x960 (4:3) / 1536x864 (4:3).

c. Third Stream: Supports fractional resolution and mirrors the frame rate and aspect ratio of the primary stream at a maximum 0.3MP - 640x480 (4:3) / 768x432 (16:9).

Provide cameras that allow video and audio signals to be transported over: 1. HTTP (Unicast). 2. HTTPS (Unicast). 3. RTP (Unicast & Multicast). 4. RTP over RTSP (Unicast). 5. RTP over RTSP over HTTP (Unicast). 6. RTP over RTSP over HTTPS (Unicast).

Image Control Requirements: 1. User Configurations Supported:



Page 6 of 15

a. Automatic and manual white balance control. b. Automatic and manually defined exposure zones operating in the range 1 and

1/8000 second. c. Flicker control (50 Hz, 60 Hz). d. Automatic and manual iris control. e. Color saturation and sharpening. f. Motion detection sensitivity and threshold. g. Digital rotation of the image. h. Minimum Dynamic Range:

1) 100db.

2) Dynamic Range shall not change based on configured encoding resolution.

2. Adaptive Video Analytics Specifications: a. Configured Behaviors: Unlimited number of configured behaviors per video

source supported. b. Automatic Analytic set up and tuning of behavior identification:

1) Upon selection of analytic and Region of Interest (ROI), the device will automatically configure behavior identification.

2) The device will constantly monitor changes in the scene and perform a tuning of the behavior identification parameters as the scene environment changes.

3. Include detection of the following behaviors: a. Object present in ROI. b. Object enters ROI. c. Object leaves ROI. d. Object appeared. e. Object disappeared. f. Object crosses a line of interest or beam. g. Object Movement Direction. h. Object loitering. i. Multiple objects in ROI over specified dwell time. j. Dwell Time. k. Number of objects exceeds limit in ROI. l. Number of objects below limit in ROI. m. Camera tampering.

Network Requirements: Provide video cameras that have the following network capabilities: 1. Supports both fixed (static) IP addresses and dynamically assigned IP addresses

provided by a Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) server. 2. Supports user configuration of network parameters including:

a. Fixed (static) IP address. b. Subnet mask. c. Gateway.



Page 7 of 15

d. Control port. 3. Are automatically detected when using a Video Management Application (VMA) or

Network Video Recorder (NVR) supporting this feature. 4. Provides support for both IPv4 and IPv6 Networks.

Video Motion Detection Functionality Requirements: Provide video cameras capable of detecting motion based on: 1. Motion Detection Mask: Defined areas within the camera’s field of view for the

camera to detect motion. 2. Sensitivity: How much each pixel within the masked areas must change before it is

considered in motion. 3. Threshold: Percentage of pixels that must detect change.

Event Functionality Requirements: Equip cameras with an integrated event functionality, which may be trigged by: 1. Alarm input terminal. 2. Video motion detection. 3. Camera temperature outside operative range.

Protocol Support Requirements: Provide video cameras that incorporate support for at least the following: 1. IPv4. 2. IPv6. 3. HTTP. 4. HTTPS. 5. SOAP. 6. DNS. 7. NTP. 8. RSTP. 9. RTCP. 10. RTP. 11. TCP. 12. UDP. 13. IGMP. 14. ICMP. 15. DHCP. 16. Zeroconf. 17. ARP. 18. SNMP v2c. 19. SNMP v3.

Streaming Support Requirements: Provide video cameras that incorporate support for at least the following: 1. RTP/UDP. 2. RTP/UDP multicast. 3. RTP/RTSP/TCP. 4. RTP/RTSP/HTTP/TCP.



Page 8 of 15

5. RTP/RTSP/HTTPS/TCP. 6. HTTP.

Video Overlay Requirements: Provide video cameras with the following overlay requirements: 1. 64 individually configurable privacy zones to conceal defined areas in image as non-

viewable. Masks required to be dynamically adjusted based on current zoom-factor, without capability of operator bypass.

2. Video masked by privacy zones must be obscured prior to streaming.

Security Requirements: Provide video cameras with the following security requirements: 1. Support the use of the following:

a. Password protection. b. HTTPS Encryption. c. Digest authentication. d. WS authentication. e. User access Log. f. SSL encryption.

2. Restrict access to the built-in internet server by usernames and passwords at three different user group levels.

Electrical Power: Cameras capable of being powered by the following power sources: 1. PoE: up to IEEE 802.3af Class 3 PoE Compliant. 2. AC Power: 24 V +/- 10%, 10 VA min (13 VA min with -IR option). 3. DC Power: 12 V +/- 10%, 7 W min (9 W min with -IR option). 4. Battery Backup: 3V manganese lithium.

Functionality: 1. Alarm input and output terminals. 2. Line audio input (for external microphone) and audio output (for external speaker)

connections. 3. Firmware reset button to reset cameras to factory default settings. 4. Enhanced Framerate Mode: Enhanced framerate mode allowing for higher framerates

when analytics are disabled on all camera heads within the system.

Diagnostics: 1. Equipped with LEDs, indicating the camera’s functional status, which may be user

enabled or disabled. 2. Monitored by functionality which automatically reinitiates processes or restarts the

unit if a malfunction is detected.

Connectivity: 1. Gigabit Ethernet-port with RJ-45 socket, auto negotiation of network speed and

transfer mode. 2. Terminal for receiving line level analog audio from an external microphone. 3. Terminal for providing line level analog audio for connection to an external speaker.



Page 9 of 15

Installation and Maintenance Requirements: Provide video cameras with the following installation and maintenance requirements: 1. Allow firmware updates via network. 2. Store customer-specific settings in a non-volatile memory which cannot be lost during



Operational Range: 1. Temperature:

a. Ceiling Mount: -10 degrees C to +50 degrees C [14 F to +122 F]. b. Pendant and Surface Mount: -40 degrees C to +60 degrees C [-40 F to +140 F].

2. Relative Humidity: 0–95 percent (non-condensing).

2.4 MULTISENSOR IP CAMERAS

9MP HD Multisensor Camera; three 3MP sensors, wide dynamic range (WDR) and a 2.8mm lens: 1. Basis of Design Product: 9C-H4A-3MH-270 – H4 Multisensor, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:

a. Image Sensors: 1/2.8-inch progressive scan CMOS. b. Aspect Ratio: 4:3. c. Active Pixels (H x V): 2048 x 1536 per sensor. d. Imaging Area (H x V): 5.18 mm x 3.89mm (0.204 inches x 0.153 inches). e. Imaging Rate: 24 fps at 60Hz and 25 fps at 50Hz. f. IR Illumination:

1) Color Mode: 0.025 lux (F1.2).

2) Mono Mode 0.005 lux (F1.2).

3) With IR Illuminator Active: 0 lux.

g. Dynamic Range: 100 dB with WDR active. h. Resolution Scaling: Down to 640 x 480. i. Angle of View: 103 degrees. j. Mounting:

1) Indoor Ceiling Mount.

2) Indoor / Outdoor Pendant Mount.

3) Indoor / Outdoor Surface Mount.

9MP HD Multisensor Camera; three 3MP sensors, wide dynamic range (WDR) and a 4mm lens: 1. Basis of Design Product: 9C-H4A-3MH-180 – H4 Multisensor, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:

a. Image Sensors: 1/2.8-inch progressive scan CMOS. b. Aspect Ratio: 4:3. c. Active Pixels (H x V): 2048 x 1536 per sensor.



Page 10 of 15

d. Imaging Area (H x V): 5.18 mm x 3.89mm (0.204 inches x 0.153 inches). e. Imaging Rate: 24 fps at 60 Hz and 25 fps at 50Hz. f. IR Illumination:








12MP HD Multisensor Camera; four 3MP sensors, wide dynamic range (WDR) and a 2.8mm lens:

a. Basis of Design Product: 12C-H4A-4MH-360 – H4 Multisensor, by Avigilon. b. Performance: c. Image Sensors: 1/2.8-inch progressive scan CMOS. d. Aspect Ratio: 4:3. e. Active Pixels (H x V): 2048 x 1536 per sensor. f. Imaging Area (H x V): 5.18 mm x 3.89mm (0.204 inches x 0.153 inches). g. Imaging Rate: 20 fps at 60 Hz and 20 fps at 50Hz. h. IR Illumination:




i. Dynamic Range: 100 dB with WDR active. j. Resolution Scaling: Down to 640 x 480. k. Angle of View: 103 degrees. l. Mounting:




15MP HD Multisensor Camera; three 5MP sensors, wide dynamic range (WDR) and a 2.8mm lens: 1. Basis of Design Product: 15C-H4A-3MH-270 – H4 Multisensor, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:

a. Image Sensors: 1/2.8-inch progressive scan CMOS.



Page 11 of 15

b. Aspect Ratio: 4:3. c. Active Pixels (H x V): 2592 x 1944 per sensor. d. Imaging Area (H x V): 5.18 mm x 3.89mm (0.204 inches x 0.153 inches). e. Imaging Rate: 15 fps at 60 Hz and 17 fps at 50Hz. f. IR Illumination:








15MP HD Multisensor Camera; three 5MP sensors, wide dynamic range (WDR) and a 4mm lens: 1. Basis of Design Product: 15C-H4A-3MH-180 – H4 Multisensor, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:

a. Image Sensors: 1/2.8-inch progressive scan CMOS. b. Aspect Ratio: 4:3. c. Active Pixels (H x V): 2592 x 1944 per sensor. d. Imaging Area (H x V): 5.18 mm x 3.89mm (0.204 inches x 0.153 inches). e. Imaging Rate: 15 fps at 60 Hz and 17 fps at 50Hz. f. IR Illumination:








20MP HD Multisensor Camera; four 5MP sensors, wide dynamic range (WDR) and a 2.8mm lens: 1. Basis of Design Product: 20C-H4A-4MH-360 – H4 Mutlisensor, by Avigilon.



Page 12 of 15

2. Performance: a. Image Sensors: 1/2.8-inch progressive scan CMOS. b. Aspect Ratio: 4:3. c. Active Pixels (H x V): 2592 x 1944 per sensor. d. Imaging Area (H x V): 5.18 mm x 3.89mm (0.204 inches x 0.153 inches). e. Imaging Rate: 13 fps at 60 Hz and 13 fps at 50Hz. f. IR Illumination:



3) With IR illuminator Active: 0 lux.





24MP HD Multisensor Camera; with three 8MP sensors, wide dynamic range (WDR) and a 4mm lens: 1. Basis of Design Product: 24C-H4A-3MH-270 – H4 Multisensor, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:




3) With IR Illuminator: 0 lux.







Page 13 of 15

24MP HD Multisensor Camera: with three 8MP sensors, wide dynamic range (WDR) and a 5.2mm lens: 1. Basis of Design Product: 24C-H4A-3MH-180 – H4 Multisensor, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:









32MP HD Multisensor Camera; four 8MP sensors, wide dynamic range (WDR) and 4mm lens: 1. Basis of Design Product: 32C-H4A-4MH-360 – H4 Multisensor, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:










Page 14 of 15


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION


3.3 INSTALLATION


3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP






3.5 ADJUSTING


3.6 CLOSEOUT



Page 15 of 15







manufacturer.




END OF SECTION


IP CAMERAS SECTION 28 21 14

Page 1 of 36

SECTION 28 21 14

IP CAMERAS

PART 1 GENERAL


Box-type network cameras for video surveillance.

Indoor dome-type network cameras for video surveillance.

Indoor in-ceiling mount, dome-type network cameras for video surveillance.

Outdoor bullet-type network cameras for video surveillance

Outdoor dome-type network cameras for video surveillance.

Outdoor pendant mounted, dome-type network cameras for video surveillance.














Services, and Security Management.



Page 2 of 36

2. General Contractor. 3. Project Manager. 4. Manufacturer’s Representative. 5. Project Engineer. 6. Security Consultant.










systems.





Spare Parts: All Spare Parts must be delivered to the owner in their original sealed packaging. Clearly label with “SPARE: DO NOT REMOVE”, and include manufacturer part numbers, and date of delivery to Owner. Store all spare parts in an environment and condition recommended by the manufacturer. 1. One spare for each _______ devices.



Page 3 of 36

2. Provide spare components as noted in the coordinating schedule for work listed in this section.




required by authority having jurisdiction. 2. Installer must be capable of providing references that will attest to successful

completion of projects of similar scope as the work noted in this section. 3. Installer must be certified by the manufacturer and be up to date with all training

required to maintain good standing.


1.8 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




system consisting of network cameras and the following components: a. Video Management System Analytics.



Page 4 of 36

b. Video Management System Interfaces. c. Video Surveillance Positioning Equipment. d. Video Surveillance Sensors.

2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA


interfaces and software development kits. 2. All systems must be capable of functioning autonomously during a failure of one or

more of the related sections. 3. Cameras in this section must be capable of bi-directional communication. 4. Video monitoring system to be interfaced through digital communication protocols



Union. 2. RCM certification mark for Australia.

Safety Standards: 1. UL/CSA/IEC/EN 62368-1. 2. With IR: IEC 62471.


Electromagnetic Immunity Standards: 1. EN 55024. 2. EN 61000-6-1.






Page 5 of 36

Video Requirements: 1. Provide cameras capable of simultaneously delivering at least three individual video



3. By generating a secondary stream at fractional resolutions of the primary stream, Video device must support HDSM-High Definition Stream Management and/or Dynamic Bandwidth Management.










9. Support motion compensation and motion vector during motion estimation in H.264, able to maintain frame rate, regardless of scene complexity, when bandwidth is capped at 12mbps at 30 FPS for 1-3MP and 20mbps at 30 FPS for 5-8MP.




a. Automatic and manual white balance control. b. Automatic and manually defined exposure zones operating in the range 1/7 to

1/8196 sec second.



Page 6 of 36

c. Flicker control (50 Hz, 60 Hz). d. Automatic and manual iris control. e. Color saturation and sharpening. f. Motion detection sensitivity and threshold. g. Digital rotation of the image when used with control center software. h. Minimum Dynamic Range: i. 83dB for 2-5MP and 85dB for 6-8MP. Dynamic Range shall not change based

on configured encoding resolution.

Adaptive Video Analytics Specifications: 1. Configured Behaviors: Unlimited number of configured behaviors per video source

supported. 2. Automatic Analytic set up and tuning of behavior identification:

a. Upon selection of analytic and Region of Interest (ROI), the device will automatically configure behavior identification.

b. The device will constantly monitor changes in the scene and perform a tuning of the behavior identification parameters as the scene environment changes.




a. Fixed (static) IP address. b. Subnet mask. c. Gateway. d. Control port.

3. Are automatically detected when using a Video Management Application (VMA) or Network Video Recorder (NVR) supporting this feature.

4. Provides support for both IPv4 and IPv6 Networks.



Page 7 of 36




Event Functionality Requirements: Equip cameras with an integrated event functionality, which may be trigged by: 1. Alarm input terminal. 2. Video motion detection. 3. Camera temperature outside operative range.


Streaming Support Requirements: Provide video cameras that incorporate support for at least the following: 1. RTP/UDP. 2. RTP/UDP multicast. 3. RTP/RTSP/TCP. 4. RTP/RTSP/HTTP/TCP. 5. RTP/RTSP/HTTPS/TCP. 6. HTTP.



Page 8 of 36







Electrical Power: Cameras capable of being powered by the following power sources: 1. PoE: IEEE 802.3af Class 3 PoE Compliant. 2. AC Power: 24 V +/- 10%, 15 VA min for bullet, 24 V +/- 10%, 13 VA min for dome,

and 24 V +/- 10%, 9 VA min for box version. 3. DC Power: 12 V +/- 10%, 13 W min for bullet, 12 V +/- 10%, 12 W min for dome and

12 V +/- 10%, 7 W min for box version. 4. Battery Backup: 3V manganese lithium.







Connectivity: 1. 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet-port with RJ-45 socket, auto negotiation of network speed

and transfer mode. 2. Terminal for receiving line level analog audio from an external microphone. 3. Terminal for providing line level analog audio for connection to an external speaker.

Operational Range:



Page 9 of 36

1. Operating Temperature: a. Box: -10 degrees C to +60 degrees C [14 F to 140 F]. b. Bullet (enclosed space): -40 degrees C to +60 degrees C [-40 F to 140 F]. c. Bullet (ambient convection): -40 degrees C to +65 degrees C [-40 F to 149 F]. d. Dome: -40 degrees C to +65 degrees C [-40 F to 140 F].

2. IR Illumination Operating Temperatures: a. Bullet: Up to +61 degrees C [141 F], 50% power from +55 degrees C to +61

degrees C [131 F to 141 F]. b. Indoor Dome: Up to +55 degrees C [131 F], 50% power from +44 degrees C to

+55 degrees C [111 F to 131 F]. c. Outdoor Dome: Up to +57 degrees C [135 F], 50% power from +49 degrees C to

+57 degrees C [120 F to 135 F]. 3. IR Illumination Hysteresis:

a. Bullet: +5 degrees C [9 F]. b. Indoor Dome: +2 degrees C [3.6 F]. c. Outdoor Dome: +2 degrees C [3.6 F].


2.4 2.0 MEGAPIXEL IP CAMERAS

2.0 MP Outdoor Dome-Type Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-DO1, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:

a. Image Sensor: 1/2.8-inch progressive scan CMOS. b. Maximum Resolution:

1) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 1920 x 1080. c. Imaging Rate: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 25 fps/30 fps. d. Dynamic Range:

1) WDR Off: 83 dB. 2) WDR On: 126dB., dual exposure (30 fps). 3) WDR On: 132dB., triple exposure (20 fps or less).

e. Minimum Illumination: 1) Color: 0.027 lux. 2) Monochrome: 0.014 lux.

f. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 34 degrees to 99 degrees. 2) Vertical angle: 16:9: 18 degrees to 53 degrees.

2.0 MP Outdoor Dome-Type Camera with 9 - 22 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-DO2, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:


1) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 1920 x 1080. c. Imaging Rate: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 25 fps/30 fps.



Page 10 of 36

d. Dynamic Range: 1) WDR Off: 83 dB. 2) WDR On: 126dB., dual exposure (30 fps). 3) WDR On: 132dB., triple exposure (20 fps or less).


f. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 2) Vertical angle: 16:9: 7.8 degrees to 16.7 degrees.

2.0 MP Outdoor Pendant-Mounted Dome-Type Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-DP1, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:






2.0 MP Outdoor Pendant-Mounted Dome-Type Camera with 9 - 22 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-DP2, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:





f. Field of View:



Page 11 of 36

1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 2) Vertical angle: 16:9: 7.8 degrees to 16.7 degrees.

2.0 MP Box-Type Camera with 4.7 - 84.6 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-B1, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:




e. f. Minimum Illumination:

1) Color: 0.039 lux. 2) Monochrome: 0.020 lux.

g. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 4.1 degrees to 60 degrees. 2) Vertical angle: 16:9: 2.3 degrees to 34 degrees.

2.0 MP Box-Type Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-B2, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:






2.0 MP Box-Type Camera with 9 - 22 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-B3, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:

a. Image Sensor: 1/2.8-inch progressive scan CMOS.



Page 12 of 36

b. Maximum Resolution: 1) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 1920 x 1080.

c. Imaging Rate: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 25 fps/30 fps. d. Dynamic Range:




2.0 MP Indoor Dome-Type Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-D1, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:






2.0 MP Indoor Dome-Type Camera with 9 - 22 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-D2, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:




e. Minimum Illumination:



Page 13 of 36



2.0 MP Indoor In-Ceiling Mount Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-DC1, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:












2.5 2.0 MEGAPIXEL INFRARED IP CAMERAS

2.0 MP Infrared Outdoor Dome-Type Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens.



Page 14 of 36

1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-DO1-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:




e. Minimum Illumination: 1) Color: 0.027 lux. 2) Monochrome: 0.014 lux. 3) IR: 0.0 lux.


2.0 MP Infrared Outdoor Pendant-Mounted Dome-Type Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-DP1-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:






2.0 MP Infrared Outdoor Bullet-Type Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-BO1-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:





Page 15 of 36




2.0 MP Infrared Outdoor Bullet-Type Camera with 9 - 22 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-BO2-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:






2.0 MP Infrared Indoor Dome-Type Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-D1-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:




e. Minimum Illumination: 1) Color: 0.027 lux.



Page 16 of 36

2) Monochrome: 0.014 lux. 3) IR: 0.0 lux.


2.0 MP Infrared Indoor In-Ceiling Mount Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-DC1-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:









1) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 2560 x 1440. 2) Aspect Ratio: 4:3: 2304x1728.

c. Imaging Rate: 1) WDR Off: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 25 fps/30 fps. 2) WDR On: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 20 fps/20 fps.

d. Dynamic Range: 1) WDR Off: 83 dB. 2) WDR On: 126dB.


f. Field of View:



Page 17 of 36

1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 34 degrees to 92 degrees. 2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 34 degrees to 92 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 18 degrees to 50 degrees 4) Vertical angle: 4:3: 25 degrees to 68 degrees







f. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 8.2 degrees to 17.4 degrees







f. Field of View:



Page 18 of 36















f. Field of View:



Page 19 of 36















f. Field of View:



Page 20 of 36









4.0MP Indoor In-Ceiling Mount Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 4.0C-H5A-DC1, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:






f. Field of View:



Page 21 of 36


4.0MP Indoor In-Ceiling Mount Camera with 9 - 22 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 4.0C-H5A-DC2, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:








4.0 MP Infrared Outdoor Dome-Type Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 4.0C-H5A-DO1-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:








Page 22 of 36

2) Monochrome: 0.015 lux. 3) With IR: 0 lux.

f. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 34 degrees to 92 degrees. 2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 34 degrees to 92 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 18 degrees to 50 degrees 4) Vertical angle: 4:3: 25 degrees to 68 degrees






e. Minimum Illumination: 1) Color: 0.030 lux. 2) Monochrome: 0.015 lux. 3) With IR: 0 lux.

f. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 34 degrees to 92 degrees. 2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 34 degrees to 92 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 18 degrees to 50 degrees. 4) Vertical angle: 4:3: 25 degrees to 68 degrees.








Page 23 of 36



4.0 MP Infrared Outdoor Bullet-Type Camera with 9 - 22 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 4.0C-H5A-BO2, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:






f. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 8.2 degrees to 17.4 degrees.





d. Dynamic Range: 1) WDR Off: 83 dB.



Page 24 of 36

2) WDR On: 126dB. e. Minimum Illumination:

1) Color: 0.030 lux. 2) Monochrome: 0.015 lux. 3) With IR: 0 lux.


4.0MP Infrared Indoor In-Ceiling Mount Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 4.0C-H5A-DC1-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:










1) Aspect Ratio: 4:3: 2592x1944. 2) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 2560 x 1440.

c. Imaging Rate:



Page 25 of 36

1) WDR Off: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 25 fps/30 fps. 2) WDR On: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 20 fps/20 fps.



f. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 8.1 degrees to 17.4 degrees. 4) Vertical angle: 4:3: 11 degrees to 23 degrees.











c. Imaging Rate:



Page 26 of 36

1) WDR Off: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 25 fps/30 fps. 2) WDR On: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 20 fps/20 fps.









1) WDR Off: 85 dB. 2) WDR On: 120dB.








Page 27 of 36



















Page 28 of 36



















Page 29 of 36


















Page 30 of 36









6.0 MP Infrared Bullet-Type Camera with 4.9 - 8 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 6.0C-H5A-BO1-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:






f. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 52 degrees to 92 degrees.



Page 31 of 36

2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 41 degrees to 73 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 29 degrees to 51 degrees. 4) Vertical angle: 4:3: 27 degrees to 48 degrees.




1) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 3840x2160. c. Imaging Rate: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 25 fps/30 fps. d. Dynamic Range:














Page 32 of 36



















Page 33 of 36

2) Vertical angle: 16:9: 29 degrees to 51 degrees.
















1) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 3840x2160. c. Imaging Rate: (50 Hz/60 Hz): 25 fps/30 fps.



Page 34 of 36










2.13 ACCESSORIES:

Brackets and Mounts: 1. H4A-MT-NPTA1: Indoor/outdoor pendant NPT mount. 2. H4A-MT-WALL1: Indoor/outdoor pendant wall arm mount. 3. H4-MT-CRNR1: Aluminum corner mounting bracket for pendant dome cameras. 4. H4-MT-CRNR1: Aluminum corner mounting bracket for bullet cameras. 5. H4-MT-POLE1: Aluminum pole mounting bracket for pendant dome cameras. 6. H4-MT-POLE1: Aluminum pole mounting bracket for bullet cameras.

Camera Covers: 1. H4A-DC-CLER1: In-ceiling dome camera cover with clear bubble. 2. H4A-DC-CLER1-BL: Black in-ceiling dome camera cover with clear bubble. 3. H4A-DC-SMOK1: In-ceiling dome camera cover with smoked bubble. 4. H4A-DC-SMOK1-BL: Black in-ceiling dome camera cover with smoked bubble. 5. H4A-DD-CLER1: Indoor dome camera cover with clear bubble. 6. H4A-DD-CLER1-BL: Black indoor dome camera cover with clear bubble. 7. H4A-DO-CLER1 : Outdoor dome camera cover with clear bubble.



Page 35 of 36

8. H4A-DO-SMOK1 : Outdoor dome camera cover with smoked bubble. 9. H4A-DP-CLER1 : Pendant dome camera cover with clear bubble. 10. H4A-DP-SMOK1: Pendant dome camera cover with smoked bubble. 11. H4A-DD-SMOK1: Indoor dome camera cover with smoked bubble. 12. H4A-DD-SMOK1-BL: Black indoor dome camera cover with smoked bubble.

Other: 1. CM-AC-GROM1 : Pipe grommets. 2. H4A-AC-GROM1: Camera sealing grommets. 3. H4A-DD-SDWL1: Indoor dome camera sidewall knockout plugs. 4. H4A-DD-SDWL1-BL: Black indoor dome camera sidewall knockout plugs. 5. H4-BO-JBOX1: Junction box for bullet cameras. 6. H4-DC-CPNL1: Metal ceiling panel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION


3.3 INSTALLATION


3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP







Page 36 of 36


3.5 ADJUSTING


3.6 CLOSEOUT







manufacturer.




END OF SECTION


IP CAMERAS SECTION 28 21 14.1

Page 1 of 35

SECTION 28 21 14.1 IP CAMERAS

PART 1 GENERAL


Box-type network cameras for video surveillance.

Indoor dome-type network cameras for video surveillance.

Indoor in-ceiling mount, dome-type network cameras for video surveillance.

Outdoor bullet-type network cameras for video surveillance


Outdoor pendant mounted, dome-type network cameras for video surveillance.




Section 28 25 00 - Video Surveillance Positioning Equipment.










Page 2 of 35








systems.






section.




required by authority having jurisdiction.



Page 3 of 35

2. Installer must be capable of providing references that will attest to successful completion of projects of similar scope as the work noted in this section.

3. Installer must be certified by the manufacturer and be up to date with all training required to maintain good standing.


1.8 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA



more of the related sections. 3. Cameras in this section must be capable of bi-directional communication.



Page 4 of 35

4. Video monitoring system to be interfaced through digital communication protocols including but not limited to ASCII or Hexadecimal Data Transmissions.


Union. 2. RCM certification mark for Australia.

Safety Standards: 1. UL/CSA/IEC/EN 62368-1. 2. With IR: IEC 62471.






Video Requirements: 1. Provide cameras capable of simultaneously delivering at least three individual video






Page 5 of 35










9. Support motion compensation and motion vector during motion estimation in H.264, able to maintain frame rate, regardless of scene complexity, when bandwidth is capped at 12mbps at 30 FPS for 1-3MP and 20mbps at 30 FPS for 5-8MP.




a. Automatic and manual white balance control. b. Automatic and manually defined exposure zones operating in the range 1/7 to

1/8196 sec second. c. Flicker control (50 Hz, 60 Hz). d. Automatic and manual iris control. e. Color saturation and sharpening. f. Motion detection sensitivity and threshold. g. Digital rotation of the image when used with control center software. h. Minimum Dynamic Range: i. 83dB for 2-5MP and 85dB for 6-8MP. Dynamic Range shall not change based

on configured encoding resolution.



Page 6 of 35

Adaptive Video Analytics Specifications: 1. Configured Behaviors: Unlimited number of configured behaviors per video source

supported. 2. Automatic Analytic set up and tuning of behavior identification:

a. Upon selection of analytic and Region of Interest (ROI), the device will automatically configure behavior identification.

b. The device will constantly monitor changes in the scene and perform a tuning of the behavior identification parameters as the scene environment changes.










Event Functionality Requirements: Equip cameras with an integrated event functionality, which may be trigged by: 1. Alarm input terminal.



Page 7 of 35

2. Video motion detection. 3. Camera temperature outside operative range.







a. Password protection. b. HTTPS Encryption. c. Digest authentication. d. WS authentication.



Page 8 of 35

e. User access Log. f. SSL encryption.


Electrical Power: Cameras capable of being powered by the following power sources: 1. PoE: IEEE 802.3af Class 3 PoE Compliant. 2. AC Power: 24 V +/- 10%, 15 VA min for bullet, 24 V +/- 10%, 13 VA min for dome,

and 24 V +/- 10%, 9 VA min for box version. 3. DC Power: 12 V +/- 10%, 13 W min for bullet, 12 V +/- 10%, 12 W min for dome and

12 V +/- 10%, 7 W min for box version. 4. Battery Backup: 3V manganese lithium.









Operational Range: 1. Operating Temperature:

a. Box: -10 degrees C to +60 degrees C [14 F to 140 F]. b. Bullet (enclosed space): -40 degrees C to +60 degrees C [-40 F to 140 F]. c. Bullet (ambient convection): -40 degrees C to +65 degrees C [-40 F to 149 F]. d. Dome: -40 degrees C to +65 degrees C [-40 F to 140 F].

2. IR Illumination Operating Temperatures: a. Bullet: Up to +61 degrees C [141 F], 50% power from +55 degrees C to +61

degrees C [131 F to 141 F]. b. Indoor Dome: Up to +55 degrees C [131 F], 50% power from +44 degrees C to

+55 degrees C [111 F to 131 F]. c. Outdoor Dome: Up to +57 degrees C [135 F], 50% power from +49 degrees C to

+57 degrees C [120 F to 135 F]. 3. IR Illumination Hysteresis:



Page 9 of 35

a. Bullet: +5 degrees C [9 F]. b. Indoor Dome: +2 degrees C [3.6 F]. c. Outdoor Dome: +2 degrees C [3.6 F].


















Page 10 of 35












2.0 MP Box-Type Camera with 4.7 - 84.6 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-B1, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:




e.



Page 11 of 35

f. Minimum Illumination: 1) Color: 0.039 lux. 2) Monochrome: 0.020 lux.

g. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 4.1 degrees to 60 degrees. 2) Vertical angle: 16:9: 2.3 degrees to 34 degrees.













2.0 MP Indoor Dome-Type Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5A-D1, by Avigilon.



Page 12 of 35

2. Performance: a. Image Sensor: 1/2.8-inch progressive scan CMOS. b. Maximum Resolution:

















Page 13 of 35


















Page 14 of 35


















Page 15 of 35

















Page 16 of 35

2) Monochrome: 0.014 lux. 3) IR: 0.0 lux.


















Page 17 of 35


















Page 18 of 35

2) Monochrome: 0.029 lux. f. Field of View:

1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 8.2 degrees to 17.4 degrees
















Page 19 of 35


















Page 20 of 35

2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 8.2 degrees to 17.4 degrees

4.0MP Indoor In-Ceiling Mount Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 4.0C-H5A-DC1, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:







4.0MP Indoor In-Ceiling Mount Camera with 9 - 22 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 4.0C-H5A-DC2, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:






f. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 14 degrees to 31 degrees.



Page 21 of 35

3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 8.2 degrees to 17.4 degrees















f. Field of View:



Page 22 of 35

1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 34 degrees to 92 degrees. 2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 34 degrees to 92 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 18 degrees to 50 degrees. 4) Vertical angle: 4:3: 25 degrees to 68 degrees.








4.0 MP Infrared Outdoor Bullet-Type Camera with 9 - 22 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 4.0C-H5A-BO2, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:








Page 23 of 35

3) With IR: 0 lux. f. Field of View:

1) Horizontal angle: 16:9: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 2) Horizontal angle: 4:3: 14 degrees to 31 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 8.2 degrees to 17.4 degrees.








4.0MP Infrared Indoor In-Ceiling Mount Camera with 3.3 - 9 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 4.0C-H5A-DC1-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:








Page 24 of 35


















Page 25 of 35


















Page 26 of 35



















Page 27 of 35

2) Horizontal angle: 3:2: 41 degrees to 73 degrees. 3) Vertical angle: 16:9: 29 degrees to 51 degrees. 4) Vertical angle: 3:2: 27 degrees to 48 degrees.

















Page 28 of 35


















Page 29 of 35















6.0 MP Infrared Bullet-Type Camera with 4.9 - 8 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 6.0C-H5A-BO1-IR, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:



Page 30 of 35



















Page 31 of 35
















8.0 MP Indoor In-Ceiling Mount Camera with 4.9 - 8 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 8.0C-H5A-DC1, by Avigilon.



Page 32 of 35

2. Performance: a. Image Sensor: 1/1.8-inch progressive scan CMOS. b. Maximum Resolution:



















Page 33 of 35















2.13 ACCESSORIES:

Brackets and Mounts: 1. H4A-MT-NPTA1: Indoor/outdoor pendant NPT mount. 2. H4A-MT-WALL1: Indoor/outdoor pendant wall arm mount. 3. H4-MT-CRNR1: Aluminum corner mounting bracket for pendant dome cameras.



Page 34 of 35

4. H4-MT-CRNR1: Aluminum corner mounting bracket for bullet cameras. 5. H4-MT-POLE1: Aluminum pole mounting bracket for pendant dome cameras. 6. H4-MT-POLE1: Aluminum pole mounting bracket for bullet cameras.

Camera Covers: 1. H4A-DC-CLER1: In-ceiling dome camera cover with clear bubble. 2. H4A-DC-CLER1-BL: Black in-ceiling dome camera cover with clear bubble. 3. H4A-DC-SMOK1: In-ceiling dome camera cover with smoked bubble. 4. H4A-DC-SMOK1-BL: Black in-ceiling dome camera cover with smoked bubble. 5. H4A-DD-CLER1: Indoor dome camera cover with clear bubble. 6. H4A-DD-CLER1-BL: Black indoor dome camera cover with clear bubble. 7. H4A-DO-CLER1 : Outdoor dome camera cover with clear bubble. 8. H4A-DO-SMOK1 : Outdoor dome camera cover with smoked bubble. 9. H4A-DP-CLER1 : Pendant dome camera cover with clear bubble. 10. H4A-DP-SMOK1: Pendant dome camera cover with smoked bubble. 11. H4A-DD-SMOK1: Indoor dome camera cover with smoked bubble. 12. H4A-DD-SMOK1-BL: Black indoor dome camera cover with smoked bubble.

Other: 1. CM-AC-GROM1 : Pipe grommets. 2. H4A-AC-GROM1: Camera sealing grommets. 3. H4A-DD-SDWL1: Indoor dome camera sidewall knockout plugs. 4. H4A-DD-SDWL1-BL: Black indoor dome camera sidewall knockout plugs. 5. H4-BO-JBOX1: Junction box for bullet cameras. 6. H4-DC-CPNL1: Metal ceiling panel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION


3.3 INSTALLATION




Page 35 of 35

3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP






3.5 ADJUSTING


3.6 CLOSEOUT







manufacturer.




END OF SECTION



Page 1 of 10

SECTION 28 21 14.2 IP CAMERAS

PART 1 GENERAL


Pan-Tilt-Zoom (PTZ) Infrared Network Type Cameras for video surveillance.


Section 28 21 15 - Specialty Cameras.

Section 28 21 21 - Illuminators.











views of each product to be installed.



Page 2 of 10

2. Coordinate with locations listed on Contract Drawings.





systems.






section.










Page 3 of 10

1.8 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA



more of the related sections. 3. Cameras in this section must be capable of bi-directional communication. 4. Video monitoring system to be interfaced through digital communication protocols



Union. 2. RCM certification mark for Australia. 3. EAC certification mark for Customs Union (Russia, Belarus, Kazakhstan).



Page 4 of 10

4. KC certification mark for Korea.





Standards: 1. Video Standards: H.264 / MJPEG / HDSM SmartCodec technology. 2. Image Standards: MPEG-4 - ISO/IEC 14496-10 AVC (H.264). 3. Networking Standards:








2. Provide independently configured simultaneous H.264 and Motion JPEG streams (multi-stream).





Page 5 of 10

5. Support motion compensation and motion vector during motion estimation in H.264, able to maintain frame rate, regardless of scene complexity, when bandwidth is capped at 17.5mbps at 12 FPS.



Image Control Requirements: 1. Image Compression Method: H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC), Motion JPEG, HDSM. 2. Streaming: Multi-stream H.264 and Motion JPEG. 3. Motion Detection: Selectable sensitivity and threshold. 4. Electronic Shutter Control: Automatic, Manual (1/1 to 1/10,000 sec). 5. Iris Control: Automatic, Manual. 6. Day/Night Control: Automatic, Manual. 7. Flicker Control: 50 Hz, 60 Hz. 8. White Balance: Automatic, Manual. 9. Backlight Compensation: Manual. 10. Privacy Zones: Up to 64 zones.






Protocol Support Requirements: Provide video cameras that incorporate support for at least the following: 1. IPv4. 2. IPv6. 3. HTTP. 4. HTTPS. 5. SOAP. 6. DNS. 7. NTP.



Page 6 of 10

8. RSTP. 9. RTCP. 10. RTP. 11. TCP. 12. UDP. 13. IGMP. 14. ICMP. 15. DHCP. 16. Zeroconf. 17. ARP. 18. SNMP v2c. 19. SNMP v3.








Electrical Power: Cameras capable of being powered by the following power sources: a. 75 W max with 24 VDC aux power, 71W max with 95W PoE, 105 VA with 24

V AC RMS aux power. b. 95W PoE: POE-INJ2-95W. c. 60W PoE: POE-INJ2-60W.

2. AC Power: 24 V +/- 10%. 3. DC Power: 24V +/- 10%.



Page 7 of 10

4. Battery Backup: 3V manganese lithium.










a. -40 °C to +60 °C (-40 °F to 140 °F) with external power or 95 W PoE. b. -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F) with 60W PoE. c. Wiper is functional at 1 °C to +60 °C (34 °F to 140 °F).


2.4 PAN-TILT-ZOOM (PTZ) INFRARED NETWORK TYPE CAMERA

1.0 MP 45x IR PTZ Camera with Wiper: 1. Basis of Design Product: 1.0C-H4IRPTZ-DP45-WP, by Avigilon. 2. Performance:

a. Image Sensor: 1/2.8-inch progressive scan CMOS. b. Active Pixels (H x V): 1280x720. c. Imaging Area (H x V): 4.8 mm x 2.7mm (0.189 inches x 0.106 inches). d. Imaging Rate: Up to 60 fps. e. Dynamic Range: 120 dB. f. Minimum Illumination:

1) With IR: 0 lux (F1.6). 2) Without IR: Color - 0.1 lux (F1.6), Monochrome - 0.03 lux (F1.6).

g. Resolution Scaling: Down to (16:9) 384x216 or (5:4) 320x256. h. Angle of View: 1.5 Degrees – 63.7 Degrees. i. Optical Zoom: 45x. j. IR Illumination: 250 m (820 ft) maximum distance at 0 lux.



Page 8 of 10





2.5 ACCESSORIES

Mounts: 1. IRPTZ-MNT-WALL1: Mount, Pend wall, IR PTZ. 2. IRPTZ-MNT-NPTA1: Mount, Pend NPT Adapter, IR PTZ. 3. H4-MT-POLE1: Pole Mounting Bracket. 4. H4-MT-CRNR1: Corner Mounting Bracket.

Electrical Power: 1. POE-INJ2-95W-NA: Single Port PoE Injector Gigabit, 95W, NA - indoor installation

rated. 2. POE-INJ2-60W: Single Port PoE Injector Gigabit, 60W, NA - indoor installation

rated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION




Page 9 of 10

3.3 INSTALLATION


3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP






3.5 ADJUSTING


3.6 CLOSEOUT







manufacturer.

Device Configuration Backup:



Page 10 of 10

1. Using manufacturer’s backup software tool or VMA/NVR, perform a full system back-up at completion of initial programming.

2. Deliver configuration backup files, restoration application and instructions detailing for restoration of back-up configuration.

END OF SECTION


IP PTZ CAMERAS SECTION 28 21 15

Page 1 of 10

SECTION 28 21 15

IP PTZ CAMERAS

PART 1 GENERAL


Pan-Tilt-Zoom (PTZ) Infrared Network Type Cameras for video surveillance.














Services, and Security Management. 2. General Contractor. 3. Project Manager. 4. Manufacturer’s Representative. 5. Project Engineer. 6. Security Consultant.




Page 2 of 10









systems.





Spare Parts: All Spare Parts must be delivered to the owner in their original sealed packaging. Clearly label with “SPARE: DO NOT REMOVE”, and include manufacturer part numbers, and date of delivery to Owner. Store all spare parts in an environment and condition recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Provide spare components as noted in the coordinating schedule for work listed in this

section.





Page 3 of 10






1.8 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Basis of Design Manufacturer: Avigilon. 1. Address: 555 Robson St., Vancouver, BC, V6B 1A6, Canada. 2. Phone: (888) 281-5182. 3. Website: www.avigilon.com. 4. Manufacturer:



2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

System Design:



Page 4 of 10






Union. 2. RCM certification mark for Australia. 3. EAC certification mark for Customs Union (Russia, Belarus, Kazakhstan). 4. KC certification mark for Korea.





Standards: 1. Video Standards: H.264 / MJPEG / HDSM SmartCodec technology. 2. Image Standards: MPEG-4 - ISO/IEC 14496-10 AVC (H.264). 3. Networking Standards:






Page 5 of 10








5. Support motion compensation and motion vector during motion estimation in H.264, able to maintain frame rate, regardless of scene complexity, when bandwidth is capped at 17.5mbps at 12 FPS.



Image Control Requirements: 1. Image Compression Method: H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC), Motion JPEG, HDSM. 2. Streaming: Multi-stream H.264 and Motion JPEG. 3. Motion Detection: Selectable sensitivity and threshold. 4. Electronic Shutter Control: Automatic, Manual (1/1 to 1/10,000 sec). 5. Iris Control: Automatic, Manual. 6. Day/Night Control: Automatic, Manual. 7. Flicker Control: 50 Hz, 60 Hz. 8. White Balance: Automatic, Manual. 9. Backlight Compensation: Manual. 10. Privacy Zones: Up to 64 zones.


provided by a Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) server.



Page 6 of 10

2. Supports user configuration of network parameters including: a. Fixed (static) IP address. b. Subnet mask. c. Gateway. d. Control port.









Page 7 of 10





Electrical Power: Cameras capable of being powered by the following power sources: a. 75 W max with 24 VDC aux power, 71W max with 95W PoE, 105 VA with 24

V AC RMS aux power. b. 95W PoE: POE-INJ2-95W. c. 60W PoE: POE-INJ2-60W.

2. AC Power: 24 V +/- 10%. 3. DC Power: 24V +/- 10%. 4. Battery Backup: 3V manganese lithium.










a. -40 °C to +60 °C (-40 °F to 140 °F) with external power or 95 W PoE.



Page 8 of 10

b. -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F) with 60W PoE. c. Wiper is functional at 1 °C to +60 °C (34 °F to 140 °F).


2.4 PAN-TILT-ZOOM (PTZ) INFRARED NETWORK TYPE CAMERA









2.5 ACCESSORIES

Mounts: 1. IRPTZ-MNT-WALL1: Mount, Pend wall, IR PTZ. 2. IRPTZ-MNT-NPTA1: Mount, Pend NPT Adapter, IR PTZ. 3. H4-MT-POLE1: Pole Mounting Bracket. 4. H4-MT-CRNR1: Corner Mounting Bracket.



Page 9 of 10

Electrical Power: 1. POE-INJ2-95W-NA: Single Port PoE Injector Gigabit, 95W, NA - indoor installation

rated. 2. POE-INJ2-60W: Single Port PoE Injector Gigabit, 60W, NA - indoor installation

rated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION


3.3 INSTALLATION


3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP








Page 10 of 10

3.5 ADJUSTING


3.6 CLOSEOUT







manufacturer.




END OF SECTION


OUTDOOR DOME CAMERAS


SECTION 28 21 13


PART 1 GENERAL















Sequencing / Scheduling: Provide to Owner or Owner’s representative a schedule and list of participants required to attend coordination and progress update meetings. 1. General Contractor. 2. Project Manager. 3. Manufacturer’s Representative. 4. Project Engineer. 5. Security Consultant.













systems.






section.











1.8 WARRANTY

Manufacturer Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty covering parts and labor costs to repair or replace part that fail to perform. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer standard for parts and labor warranty for 60 months. 2. Service During Warranty: Provide direct support to Owner via phone and email,


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

System Design:







including but not limited to ASCII or Hexadecimal Data Transmissions. 5. Cameras in this section must allow firmware updates via network. 6. Cameras must be compatible with Microsoft Windows-based management software,

allowing camera configuration, upgrade of firmware, and backup of individual camera configurations.

System Certifications: 1. UL and cUL certification marks for Canada/USA. 2. CE certification mark for European Union. 3. ROHS mark for European Union. 4. RCM certification mark for Australia. 5. WEEE mark for European Union.

Safety Standards: 1. UL/CSA/IEC/EN 62368-1. 2. IEC 62471.

Environmental Standards: 1. IP66 Weather Rating. 2. IK08 Impact Rating.





a. IEEE 802.3af (Power over Ethernet).




b. IEEE 802.1X (Authentication). c. IPv4 (RFC 791). d. IPv6.









4. Support Motion JPEG encoding in a selectable range from 1 up to 24 or 30 frames per second for 5 MP or 2 MP resolution, respectively.

5. Support H.264 encoding in a selectable range from 1 up to 24 or 30 frames per second for 5 MP or 2 MP resolution, respectively.

6. Support H.265 encoding in a selectable range from 1 up to 24 or 30 frames per second for 5 MP or 2 MP resolution, respectively.




10. Support motion compensation and motion vector during motion estimation in H.264, able to maintain frame rate, regardless of scene complexity, when bandwidth is capped at 12mbps at 30 FPS for 1-3MP and 20mbps at 24 FPS for up to 5 MP.

Provide cameras that allow video signals to be transported over: 1. HTTP (Unicast). 2. HTTPS (Unicast). 3. RTP/UDP (Unicast & Multicast). 4. RTP over RTSP (Unicast). 5. RTP over RTSP over HTTP (Unicast). 6. RTP over RTSP over HTTPS (Unicast).




Image Control and User Configuration Requirements: 1. Automatic and manual white balance control. 2. Automatic and manually defined exposure zones operating in the range 1/7.5 to

1/8000 sec. 3. Flicker control (50 Hz, 60 Hz). 4. Tamper detection. 5. Video Motion Detection:

a. Motion Detection Mask: Defined areas within the camera’s field of view for the camera to detect motion.

b. Sensitivity: How much each pixel within the masked areas must change before it is considered in motion.

c. Threshold: Percentage of pixels that must detect change. 6. Unusual Motion Detection:

a. Configured Behaviors: Unlimited number of configured behaviors per video source supported.

b. Automatic Analytic set up and tuning of behavior identification: 1) The device will constantly monitor changes in the scene and identifies

abnormalities as the scene environment changes. c. Include detection of camera tampering.

7. Video Overlay Requirements: Provide video cameras with the following overlay requirements: a. 64 individually configurable privacy zones to conceal defined areas in image as

non-viewable. Masks required to be dynamically adjusted based on current zoom-factor, without capability of operator bypass.

b. Video masked by privacy zones must be obscured prior to streaming. 8. Digital rotation of the image when used with control center software. 9. Minimum Dynamic Range: 83dB; Dynamic Range shall not change based on

configured encoding resolution.






Protocol Support Requirements: Provide video cameras that incorporate support for at least the following:




1. IPv4. 2. IPv6. 3. HTTP. 4. HTTPS. 5. SOAP. 6. DNS. 7. NTP. 8. RTSP. 9. RTCP. 10. RTP. 11. TCP. 12. UDP. 13. IGMP. 14. ICMP. 15. DHCP. 16. Zeroconf. 17. ARP. 18. SNMP v2c. 19. SNMP v3.



a. Password protection. b. HTTPS Encryption. c. Digest authentication. d. WS authentication. e. User access log. f. 802.1x port-based authentication.


3. Store customer-specific settings in a non-volatile memory which cannot be lost during power cuts or soft reset.

Electrical Power: Cameras capable of being powered by the following power sources: 1. PoE: IEEE 802.3af Class 0 PoE Compliant. 2. Power consumption: 8 watts.




Diagnostics: 1. Equipped with LED, indicating the camera’s functional status, which may be user




and transfer mode.

Operational Range: 1. Operating Temperature: -30 degrees C to +55 degrees C [-22 F to 131 F]. 2. Storage Temperature: -40 degrees C to +70 degrees C [-40 F to 158 F]. 3. Relative Humidity: 0–95 percent (non-condensing).

2.4 INFRARED IP CAMERAS

2.0 MP Infrared Outdoor Dome-Type Camera with fixed 2.8 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 2.0C-H5M-DO1-IR 2. Performance:


1) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 1920 x 1080. 2) Aspect Ratio: 5:4: 1280 x 1024. 3) Aspect Ratio: 4:3: 1280 x 960. 4) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 1280 x 720.


1) WDR Off: 83 dB. 2) WDR On: 110dB., dual exposure.


f. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle:

(a) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 112 degrees. (b) Aspect Ratio: 5:4: 72 degrees. (c) Aspect Ratio: 4:3: 82 degrees.

2) Vertical angle: (a) Aspect Ratio: 16:9: 62 degrees. (b) Aspect Ratio: 5:4: 58 degrees. (c) Aspect Ratio: 4:3: 61 degrees.




g. Physical Dimensions: 1) Surface Mount: 100 x 100 x 115 mm (3.9 x 3.9 x 4.5 inches). 2) In-Ceiling Mount: 101 x 101 x 162 mm (4.0 x 4.0 x 6.4 inches).

(a) Max Ceiling Thickness: 25.4 mm (1 inch).

5.0 MP Infrared Outdoor Dome-Type Camera with fixed 2.8 mm lens. 1. Basis of Design Product: 5.0C-H5M-DO1-IR 2. Performance:


1) Aspect Ratio: 4:3: 2592 x 1944. 2) Aspect Ratio: 5:4: 2560 x 1440.


1) WDR Off: 83 dB. 2) WDR On: 110dB., dual exposure.

e. Operating Mode: 1) Full Feature Mode: Unusual Motion Detection Enabled. 2) High Frame Rate Mode: Unusual Motion Detection Disabled.

f. Minimum Illumination: 1) Color: 0.03 lux. 2) Monochrome: 0.015 lux. 3) IR: 0.0 lux.

g. Field of View: 1) Horizontal angle:

(a) Aspect Ratio: 5:4: 103 degrees. (b) Aspect Ratio: 4:3: 104 degrees.

2) Vertical angle: (a) Aspect Ratio: 5:4: 67 degrees. (b) Aspect Ratio: 4:3: 77 degrees.

h. Physical Dimensions: 1) Surface Mount: 100 x 100 x 115 mm (3.9 x 3.9 x 4.5 inches). 2) In-Ceiling Mount: 101 x 101 x 162 mm (4.0 x 4.0 x 6.4 inches).

(a) Max Ceiling Thickness: 25.4 mm (1 inch).

2.5 ACCESSORIES

Mounts: H5M-MT-DCIL1: In-ceiling mount adapter.

Replacement Parts: H5M-DO-BZL1: Four (4) H5M Dome Camera Shroud Replacement Parts.




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION


3.3 INSTALLATION


3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP






3.5 ADJUSTING


3.6 CLOSEOUT

Demonstration:




1. Demonstrate administration and operation of devices described by this section. 2. Demonstrate how to authorize users and applications to operate and configure installed






manufacturer.




END OF SECTION


VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SECTION 28 23 00

Page 1 of 28

SECTION 28 23 00

VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

Section Includes: 1. Network Video Management Software (NVMS). 2. Network Video Recording Hardware (NVR).











Coordination: Coordinate with Owner regarding camera network configuration and estimated bandwidth utilization prior to connection of cameras to Owner’s network.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Submit manufacturer technical specifications, typical installation drawings, system overview drawings and sample images of items included in this section.


Qualification Statements: 1. Manufacturer:

a. Submit confirmation and details of manufacturer’s warranty, extended warranty, and replacement policies.

b. Submit proceeding 3 years financial statements for equipment manufacturer.



Page 2 of 28

c. Submit list of available manufacturers provided, fee based professional services available to the Contractor or Owner including, but not limited to, the following: 1) Training. 2) Installation. 3) Commissioning. 4) Remote diagnostics and integration with 3rd party software and

hardware systems. 2. Contractor:

a. Submit confirmation that Contractor is licensed to install video surveillance and security equipment as required by authority having jurisdiction.

b. Submit history of Contractor certification(s) for items in this section. c. Submit references with contact information where Contractor has

installed items in this section. d. Submit confirmation that installer or the entity installing or supervising

the installation of this equipment has received manufacturer training and is certified by manufacturer on this equipment and that training the installer received is current.


Proof of license registration for software, hardware, firmware, operational, and administrative licenses.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

Spare Parts: 1. Deliver to Owner in its original packaging, one spare for each product noted in

camera schedule. 2. House spare parts in an environment and condition recommended by

manufacturer that is clearly labeled with “SPARE: DO NOT REMOVE”, manufacturer part number, and date of delivery to Owner.

3. Maintain packaging for spares in good condition and use as appropriate for Returns to Manufacturer (RMA).



a. Preforms camera installation, configuration, setup, programming and related work employing authorized integrators/electronic technicians certified by manufacturer.

b. Certification for authorized integrators/electronic technicians shall include at a minimum installation and service of equipment provided.



Page 3 of 28

1.9 WARRANTY:

Manufacturer Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty covering parts and labor costs to repair or replace part that fail to perform. 1. Warranty Period: 24 months from date of Substantial Completion for parts and

labor from date of purchase. 2. Service During Warranty: At no additional cost, provide manufacturer's direct

technical support to Owner via phone and email, including the following: a. Access to training and education in the form of documents, videos and

other materials via the internet. b. Software maintenance patches and version updates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



Substitution Limitations: Submit substitution requests in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00.

Source Restrictions: Supplier to provide a fully integrated surveillance system consisting of fixed position and movable network cameras and the following components obtained from a single source and provided by a single manufacturer: 1. Video Management System. 2. Video Management System Interfaces. 3. Storage Appliances for Electronic Safety and Security. 4. Video Surveillance Positioning Equipment. 5. Video Surveillance Sensors. 6. Access Control Software and Database Management.

2.2 NETWORK VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE (NVMS)

Description: Provide workstations with a simplified screen layout, intuitive controls, and customizable features that improve multi-person interactions, and include the following features: 1. Video analytics and artificial intelligence (AI) capabilities, including

appearance search, analytic event rule triggers, and unusual motion detection technology.

2. Forensic search capabilities with bookmark, event, alarm and thumbnail search options.



Page 4 of 28

3. Easy integration with leading camera and hardware manufacturers. 4. Allows monitoring of live and recorded video over wireless IP networks from

Apple or Android mobile devices. 5. License Plate Recognition (LPR) analytics with multiple watchlists. 6. Receives and acts on access control system door events, hardware input events,

and access grants. 7. Enables unlocking doors and activating digital outputs directly from a camera

view. 8. Identity search and identity verification using access control credentials to

compare against recorded and live video, respectively.

System: Provide a scalable NVMS solution with the following capabilities: 1. 100 servers per site. 2. 300 cameras per server. 3. 10,000 cameras per site. 4. Unlimited client licenses.

Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Avigilon Control Center Enterprise - Version 7.0 by Avigilon.


Description: Provide workstations with a simplified screen layout, intuitive controls, and customizable features that improve multi-person interactions, and include the following features: 1. Video analytics capabilities, including analytic event rule triggers and unusual

motion detection technology. 2. Forensic search capabilities with bookmark, event, and thumbnail search

options. 3. Easy integration with leading camera and hardware manufacturers. 4. Allows monitoring of live and recorded video over wireless IP networks from

Apple or Android mobile devices. 5. Receives and acts on access control system door events, hardware input events,

and access grants. 6. Enables unlocking doors and activating digital outputs directly from a camera

view. 7. Identity search and identity verification using access control credentials to

compare against recorded and live video, respectively.

Provide a scalable NVMS system solution with the following capabilities: 1. 1 server per site. 2. 75 cameras per server. 3. 75 cameras per site. 4. 10 concurrent client-to-site connections.

Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Avigilon Control Center Standard - Version 7.0 by Avigilon.



Page 5 of 28


Description: Provide workstations with a simplified screen layout, intuitive controls, and customizable features that improve multi-person interactions, and include the following features: 1. Video analytics capabilities, including unusual motion detection technology. 2. Forensic search capabilities with bookmark, event, and thumbnail search

options. 3. Easy integration with leading camera and hardware manufacturers. 4. Allows monitoring of live and recorded video over wireless IP networks from

Apple or Android mobile devices.

Provide a scalable NVMS system solution with the following capabilities: 1. 1 server per site. 2. 24 cameras per server. 3. 24 cameras per site. 4. 2 concurrent client-to-site connections.

Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Avigilon Control Center Core - Version 7.0 by Avigilon.

2.5 NETWORK VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE (NVMS) FUNCTIONALITY

General: Provide an NVMS software application that can be installed on any open platform hardware and does not require hardware multiplexer or time-division technology for video or audio. 1. Recording Storage Capacity: Expandable without additional licenses. 2. Video Decompression: Decompresses H.264 video through Owner supplied

graphics processing unit (GPU). 3. The NVMS server and client software applications can be installed and run on

same computer or on separate computers. 4. Languages: Provide software with versions for the following languages:

a. Arabic. b. English. c. French. d. German. e. Italian. f. Japanese. g. Korean. h. Spanish. i. Dutch.

5. Secure Transmission: Securely sends video and audio data by transmitting commands and control data via TCP/IP using cryptographic keys based on SSL/TLS to prevent eavesdropping or tampering.



Page 6 of 28

6. Device Connections: Support the recording and management of video and audio sources through use of industry standard protocols, including the following: a. ONVIF Profile S and/or Profile T. b. Select 3rd party proprietary device APIs.

7. De-warping: Supports de-warping of live and recorded video from the following devices: a. Avigilon H4 Fisheye Cameras. b. Supported cameras fitted with an Immervision Panomorph lens. c. From cameras with a fixed fisheye lens, including but not limited to the

Oncam Grandeye Evolution line of cameras.

Alarms and Events: Provide the ability to configure and manage alarms and events with the following capabilities: 1. Defines event triggers that are configured to result in an alarm. 2. Generates alarms based on the following event types:

a. Detect events that occur within a camera's field of view. b. Detect presence of persons within a sensor's range. c. Detect if video or audio signal is lost and alert system administrator. d. Door activity detected by an access control application. e. Notify users of system errors. f. Receive alarms from third party systems (access control, etc.) and

configured to be monitored. g. Support receiving digital input triggers and triggering digital outputs

from: 1) An input/output board. 2) Supported IP camera, encoder or sensor. 3) Integrated systems, including POS.

3. Receives events from devices through ONVIF driver. 4. Configure rules to trigger specific video operations. 5. Supports receiving Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) messages

from servers and alert users. 6. Customizes and forwards alarm and event notifications to the following:

a. Users logged into client application. b. Users logged into mobile application. c. Configured email addresses. d. External entities and third-party software, such as central monitoring

stations and call centers. 7. Escalates alarms from one user or group to another if alarm is unacknowledged

for a preset duration. 8. Configures email notifications to the following:

a. Notify users and system administrators when an event or system health error occurs.

b. Schedule when email notifications are sent. c. Include camera images in email notifications.

9. Configures Central Station Notifications to the following:



Page 7 of 28

a. Notify a central station monitoring service when an event or system health error occurs.

b. Include video clips and/or camera images with camera motion, analytic or digital input events.

c. Optionally use ANSI/SIA DC-09-2013 standard event notification format

10. Provides ability to send central monitoring stations periodic heartbeat messages, or regular notification to confirm system connection and that there are no events of note.

11. Arms or Disarms events and alarms based on a user configurable schedule or specific digital input state.

Event Triggers: Assign actions in response to specific event triggers. Response actions include the following: 1. User Notification Actions:

a. Display on-screen message. b. Send an email. c. Send notification to central monitoring station. d. Play a sound.

2. Monitoring Actions: a. Start live streaming video. b. Create bookmark. c. Open a saved view. d. Start live streaming on a virtual matrix monitor. e. Open a map on a virtual matrix monitor. f. Open a web page on a virtual matrix monitor.

3. Device Actions: a. Reboot camera. b. Activate digital output. c. Deactivate digital output.

4. PTZ Actions: a. Go to Preset. b. Go to Home Preset. c. Run a Pattern. d. Set Auxiliary. e. Clear Auxiliary.

5. Alarm actions: a. Trigger an alarm. b. Acknowledge an alarm.

6. Supports conditional event triggers based on selected digital input status. 7. Manually triggers digital output through the following:

a. A pre-configured software control. b. A physical trigger that is connected to a supported input/output device.

Video Analytics: Provide configurable classified object detection for each device with self-learning video analytics capabilities.



Page 8 of 28

1. Allows users to connect individual video sources to analytics appliance channels.

2. Allows users to configure events based on classified object motion detection. 3. Allows configured video analytics events to be used as alarm and rule triggers. 4. Allows users to mark classified objects as a true or false detection.

a. Transmits collected data to video source to improve accuracy of video analytics device.

5. Support the following video analytic event types when captured by supported cameras: a. Objects in area. b. Object loitering. c. Objects crossing defined line. d. Object appears or enters area. e. Object not present in area. f. Objects enter area. g. Objects leave area. h. Object stops in area. i. Anticipated direction of travel is violated. j. Tampering & Scene dramatically changes in an unexpected fashion.

Focus of Attention: Provide functionality which automatically focuses the operator’s attention during critical events. 1. Event Handling:

a. Classified object motion detection. b. Unusual motion. c. Rule based video analytic events. d. Alarm events.

2. Filtering: a. Event types: Provide a user interface which allows for inclusion or

exclusion of unnecessary event types. b. Frequent event handling: Support the identification and exclusion of

frequently recurring events on a per-camera and per event basis.

License Plate Recognition (LPR): Support operation of a license plate recognition system that include: 1. Defines region of an image where license plate detection is performed. 2. Stores detected license plates with video data. 3. Support multiple watch lists that are used to create events or alarms when

specific license plates are detected. 4. Defines the longest retention period for license plate detections for privacy

compliance.

Signal Processing and Compression: Supports storage and processing of video and audio as follows: 1. Natively records camera signals with no transcoding. 2. Supports industry standard video compression formats, including, but not

limited to, the following:



Page 9 of 28

a. JPEG2000. b. MJPEG. c. MPEG-4. d. H.264. e. H.265.

3. Synchronizes audio and video regardless of frame-rate, resolution or bitrate.

Dynamic Video Stream Management: Performs dynamic video stream management as follows: 1. Provide Avigilon High Definition Stream Management (HDSM)™. 2. Reduces system bandwidth and storage usage by only transmitting video to

client as determined by the Owner. 3. The client communicates the maximum monitor resolution to the server and

the server acts as a video proxy and stream the required video resolution. 4. Tile multi-megapixel videos streams and only transmit requested portion of

video stream to the client. 5. Extend recorded video storage by dynamically reducing quality of recorded

video over time so video is still viable but uses less storage. a. Reduces JPEG and JPEG2000 video image rate to one half or one

quarter of original image rate. b. Record both a high-quality stream and a low-quality stream, discarding

high quality streams after a set amount of time determined by the Owner. 6. Allow availability of dynamic video stream management to local users, remote

users, and mobile devices.

Event Logging: Maintain an event log and allows users to use log events as triggers for specific event actions. Logged events include the following: 1. Server events:

a. Server application starting up. b. Server application shutting down. c. Server application terminated unexpectedly. d. Server application low on resources. e. Server application installation error. f. License expires soon. g. License expired. h. Database error. i. Data initialization error. j. Data volume failed. k. Data volume recovered. l. Data volume size reduced. m. Data write error. n. Data upgrade started. o. Data upgrade completed. p. Data upgrade failed. q. Data recovery started. r. Data recovery completed.



Page 10 of 28

s. Data recovery failed. t. Bookmark save failed. u. Network connection found. v. Network connection lost. w. Email send error. x. Server hardware event. y. Archiving started. z. Archiving completed. aa. Archiving interrupted. bb. Server connection lost. cc. Analytics server queue full. dd. Analytics server connection lost. ee. LPR service restarted. ff. LPR service terminated unexpectedly.

2. Device Events: a. Connection created. b. Connection removed. c. Connection created to standby server. d. Connection removed from standby server. e. Connection failure. f. Device failed. g. Connection restored. h. Network packet loss unacceptable. i. Network packet loss acceptable. j. Motion detection started. k. Motion detection ended. l. Video analytics event started. m. Video analytics event ended. n. Tampering detected. o. Recording started. p. Recording ended. q. Recording interrupted. r. Recording resumed. s. Digital input activated. t. Digital input deactivated. u. Firmware upgrade started. v. Firmware upgrade completed. w. Firmware upgrade failed. x. Obsolete firmware detected. y. User-defined event started. z. User-defined event ended. aa. Presence detected. bb. Presence ended. cc. Presence dwell time exceeded. dd. Presence dwell time ended.

3. User Events:



Page 11 of 28

a. User login. b. User logout. c. Server setting changed. d. Site setting changed. e. Device setting changed. f. Device connected. g. Device disconnected. h. Digital output triggered. i. Bookmark added. j. Bookmark updated. k. Bookmark deleted. l. PTZ moved. m. PTZ idle. n. Export performed. o. Speaker activated. p. Speaker deactivated. q. Virtual matrix monitor opened. r. Map added. s. Map updated. t. Map deleted. u. View added. v. View updated. w. View deleted. x. Web Page added. y. Web Page updated. z. Web page deleted. aa. Site View updated. bb. Custom keyboard command triggered.

4. Alarm Events: a. Alarm acknowledged. b. Alarm auto acknowledged. c. Alarm triggered. d. Alarm assigned. e. Alarm unassigned. f. Alarm purged.

5. POS Transaction Events: a. POS transaction started. b. POS transaction ended. c. POS transaction exception.

6. License Plate Recognition Events: a. License plate detection started. b. License plate detection ended. c. License plate watchlist match.

7. Access Control Events: a. Door access denied. b. Door access granted.



Page 12 of 28

c. Door closed. d. Door forced. e. Forced door closed. f. Door held open. g. Held door closed. h. Door opened. i. Door duress. j. Door request to exit. k. Certificate validation failed. l. Input activated. m. Input deactivated. n. Input fault detected. o. Input fault cleared.

Storage Management: Allow management of recorded content with the following capabilities: 1. Multiple levels of video storage management:

a. Tier 1: Video recorded directly on local server. b. Tier 2: Recorded video continuously archived to long term storage. c. Ad Hoc: Recorded video on local server can be archived on-demand to

administrator-defined storage location. 2. Support for the following video and audio recording options:

a. Manually triggered recording. b. Pre-event and post-event recording options. c. Reference frame recording option in absence of events. d. Recording schedules that can be defined individually for each video

source, including, but not limited to continuous recording. e. Event based recording that is triggered by the following:

1) Pixel or classified object motion. 2) Digital inputs. 3) POS transactions. 4) Alarms. 5) License plates recognition.

f. Customized daily and weekly schedule.

Backup and Archiving: 1. Schedules archive of recorded video with associated events to a local folder or

mapped network drive. 2. Backs-up settings and configuration for each server, including the following:

a. Site settings; such as users/groups, maps and web pages. b. Server settings, including device connections. c. Encrypts backup to maintain security of information.

3. Restores backed-up settings and configurations to a new or replacement server in a site.



Page 13 of 28

2.6 NETWORK VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE (NVMS) CREDENTIALS AND SECURITY

Authentication: System must require users to be authenticated prior to granting access to the NVMS.

Customization: Provide access rights that can be tailored to each user or group of users. Access rights include the following: 1. View live images:

a. Use PTZ controls. b. Lock PTZ controls. c. Trigger manual recording. d. Trigger digital outputs. e. Broadcast to speakers.

2. View recorded images: a. Export images. b. Archive images. c. Create teach markers.

3. Manage saved views. 4. Manage maps. 5. Manage web pages. 6. Manage virtual matrix monitors. 7. Initiate collaboration sessions. 8. Manage user sessions. 9. Listen to microphones. 10. Setup cameras:

a. Setup general settings. b. Setup network settings. c. Setup image and display settings. d. Setup compression and image rate settings. e. Setup image dimension settings. f. Setup motion detection settings. g. Setup privacy zone settings. h. Setup manual recording settings. i. Setup digital input & output settings. j. Setup microphone settings. k. Setup speaker settings. l. Setup analytics settings. m. Setup teach by example.

11. Setup sites: a. Setup name. b. Manage site. c. Setup site view. d. Setup user and group settings. e. Setup Active Directory Synchronization. f. Setup Corporate Hierarchy.



Page 14 of 28

g. Setup alarm management settings. h. Setup POS transaction settings. i. Setup LPR settings. j. Setup email settings. k. Setup rule engine settings. l. View site logs. m. Connect and disconnect devices. n. View Site health.

12. Setup servers: a. Manage server. b. Setup schedule settings. c. Setup recording and bandwidth settings. d. Setup Storage Management. e. Backup settings. f. Setup server analytics.

Access Ranking: Provide the ability to rank access rights based on a user’s position within a configured hierarchy. 1. Ranked users may only administer changes to users and groups that are

subordinate in rank. 2. Corporate hierarchy can be used to enforce authority of a parent site over user

and group settings of one or more child sites.

Hierarchical Site families: Allow for the creation and management of parent-child relationships among sites. 1. Child sites may be connected to an appropriately licensed parent site. 2. Parent site will have control over user permission and information of a child

site. 3. If a user has access to parent site, child sites are automatically discovered.

Credentials: Allow multiple credentials for system access, including but not limited to: 1. Validation of user credentials and password entered into NVMS user database

where user passwords meet a configurable strength requirement. 2. Two-factor authentication of users in the NVMS using time-based One-Time

Password (TOTP) and a supported mobile authenticator application used to generate a code on Apple and Android mobile devices.

3. Importing members of Active Directory groups as users in NVMS. a. Automatically synchronizes changes made to members in Active

Directory with NVMS. b. Directly adds users imported from Active Directory to existing

permission groups. 4. Importing roles from Access Control Manager application.

a. Automatically synchronizes changes made to roles in the access control application with NVMS.

b. Directly adds users imported from the access control application to existing permission groups.



Page 15 of 28

c. Imported users with appropriate privileges will be able to control doors within NVMS.

5. Windows credentials.

Security: Manage and personalize user access as follows: 1. Allow administrators to override user access to an NVR if there are insufficient

licenses. 2. Allow administrators to restrict user access to any video recorded earlier than

the current login session 3. Allow administrators to restrict user access to high resolution recorded video

for privacy compliance. 4. Allow administrators to restrict specific user’s access to search features that

use what is considered personally identifiable information (PII) for privacy compliance, such as license plates and physical appearance.

5. Allow administrators to define rules that disable video or audio streams from specific devices for privacy compliance.

6. Set client software to automatically log in to multiple sites. 7. Set client software to automatically log out of all sites when application is left

idle. 8. Set client software to automatically save and restore last window layout. 9. Set maximum bandwidth of streamed video data from server to client

application. 10. Record and permit reporting on user activity including log-in, log-out events,

video export requests, live video viewing by camera, access to recorded video by camera.

2.7 NETWORK VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE (NVMS) COMPATIBILITY

Server Application Compatibility: Provide software compatible with the following server applications: 1. Avigilon Control Center Server. 2. ACC Analytics Service. 3. ACC Web Endpoint. 4. ACC LPR plug-in (V2).

Desktop Client Software Compatibility: Provide software compatible with the following client applications: 1. ACC Client. 2. ACC Virtual Matrix. 3. Avigilon Player.

Mobile Client Software Compatibility: Provide software compatible with the following mobile device applications: 1. ACC Mobile 3.x.

a. Android version 5.x or later. b. iPad, iPhone and iPod touch with iOS 10 or later.



Page 16 of 28

Monitoring Sources: Monitors video and audio sources from the following sources: 1. Avigilon cameras/encoders.

a. Avigilon H4 Pro H.264 Cameras. b. Avigilon H4 HD Cameras with Self-Learning Video Analytics. c. Avigilon H4 Multi-sensor Cameras. d. Avigilon H4 Thermal Cameras. e. Avigilon H4 Video Intercom Cameras. f. Avigilon H4 Fisheye Cameras. g. Avigilon H4 SL Cameras. h. Avigilon H4 Mini Dome Cameras. i. Avigilon H4 PTZ / IR PTZ Cameras. j. Avigilon Presence Detector Sensor. k. Avigilon HD Cameras with Self-learning Video Analytics. l. Avigilon IP H.264/JPEG2000 Cameras and Encoders. m. Avigilon HD Pro Cameras.

2. ACTi cameras/encoders 3. Arecont cameras. 4. Axis cameras/encoders. 5. Bosch cameras/encoders. 6. IQInvision cameras. 7. Mobotix cameras. 8. ONVIF Profile S and/or Profile T conformant cameras and encoders. 9. Panasonic cameras/encoders. 10. Pelco cameras. 11. Rialto Video Analytics Appliances. 12. Samsung cameras/encoders. 13. Samsung Techwin cameras. 14. Sony cameras. 15. VideoIQ cameras/encoders.

Device Discovery and Identification: Detects and systems on network by the following methods: 1. Automatic: Servers, video and audio sources that are connected to same

network as client are automatically discovered. 2. Search: Servers, video and audio sources running on a different network

segment than client can be discovered by searching for device's IP address or hostname.

3. Parent to Child: By logging into a parent site automatically discovers configured children sites.

4. Manual Detection: Allows manually discovered server instances, video and audio sources, and access control appliances to be visible to users of a single client workstation.

5. Network Settings: Identical for all users of a single client workstation.

Integration with Other Systems and Products: 1. Avigilon Access Control Manager (ACM) Application:



Page 17 of 28

a. Supports configurable network connection to an ACM appliance. b. Creates link between cameras and doors. c. Creates rules triggered by door actions that result in actions performed

by NVMS. d. Synchronizes users and user privileges from ACM to provide access to

doors. e. Supports identity verification using access control credentials to compare

access token images against live video. f. Supports identity search using access control credentials to review door

access activity in recorded video. g. Support using identity search results to initiate an appearance search

across cameras in the current or alternative sites. h. Provides door grant access while monitoring video.

2. Point of Sale (POS) Integration: a. Supports the operation of a point of sale (POS) system that includes:

1) Receiving of transaction information from POS sources. 2) Supports multiple encoding formats from POS sources. 3) Monitors live and recorded transactions from POS sources with

linked video. 4) Generates events based on POS transaction exceptions.

3. Third Party Integration Requirements: Support software level integration with third-party applications using NVMS software development kit (SDK) or Application Programming Interface (API) and provide the following features to the third-party software: a. Connection: Auto-discover servers, login and authentication. b. Video Streaming: Auto-discover connected cameras, live and recorded

video (RAW or MJPEG format; H.264 only to Windows applications). c. Video Overlays: Display overlays over streaming video (classified object

bounding boxes, motion detection, camera name/location, timestamp). d. PTZ Control: Control PTZ cameras (pan/tilt, zoom, presets, patterns, iris

and lock PTZ). e. Audio Streaming: Stream audio from third-party system to an NVMS

camera (camera to third-party system only to Windows application). f. Alarm Management: List, query, trigger, assign, acknowledge & purge

alarms. g. Event Management: List, query, subscribe for notification on events

(camera, server, administrative, digital I/O, video analytics, license plate recognition, point of sale).

h. Bookmark Management: List, query, create, delete. i. Digital Output: Trigger digital outputs. j. Archive/Export: Trigger archive or export in NVMS native export video

format or generic video/image formats including AVI, PNG, TIFF, JPEG.

4. Support integration with the following systems: a. Avigilon Access Control Manager.



Page 18 of 28

b. DSX Access Systems WinDSX. c. RS2 AccessIT! Universal.NET. d. Avigilon Control Center License Plate Recognition (V2 LPR plug-in). e. AMAG Symmetry. f. Gallagher Command Centre. g. Jacques IP Intercom. h. Lenel OnGuard. i. Paxton Net2. j. S2 Netbox. k. Software House CCure 9000. l. Vingtor-Stentofon AlphaCom.

Pan-Tilt-Zoom Configuration and Control: Enables and configures PTZ control on RS-485 interface of a video source. 1. Supports the following PTZ protocols:

a. American Dynamics Sensormatic. b. AXSYS. c. AXSYS DCU. d. Ernitec ERNA. e. Honeywell Diamond. f. JVC JCBP. g. Kalatel ASCII. h. Pelco D. i. Pelco P. j. TEB Ligne. k. Vicon extended. l. Vicon normal. m. Videotec Legacy. n. Videotec MACRO.

2. Supports pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras and provides the following: a. Supports controlling mechanical PTZ, iris and focus as well as setting

presets and patterns. b. Provides ability to name PTZ presets. c. Supports ability to create PTZ guard tours by combining a set number of

presets that are run in order or random sequence. d. Supports ability to center a PTZ camera’s field of view by clicking

anywhere on video image. e. Supports ability to click and drag to define an area for PTZ camera to

mechanically zoom and center on. f. Supports controlling mechanical PTZ camera on-screen display and

auxiliary controls. g. Support selecting digital image defog levels where supported. h. Support selecting camera day/night operation mode where supported. i. Supports locking PTZ controls. j. Permits a user with a higher rank to override a PTZ control lock. k. Supports using a USB joystick to control PTZ functions.



Page 19 of 28

2.8 NETWORK VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE (NVMS) USER INTERFACE

General: Provide a graphic user interface with the following functionality: 1. A system tree of video sources in video monitoring tab.

a. The system tree display can be configured. b. The system tree can be organized into virtual folders that are represented

as branches within site. c. Users can be granted access to individual items or entire folders within

system tree. d. Maps, saved views and web pages may be viewed.

2. Client adjustable light and dark theming with settings specific to each application and workstation.

3. Support for collaborative application window sharing within in a joint session among multiple users.

4. Support for an unlimited number of monitors used for monitoring video and audio streams connected to a single workstation. a. Displays all video sources connected to system. b. Support ability to drag and drop items from system tree into video

monitoring area. c. Support monitoring live and recorded video and audio streams

simultaneously on same monitor. d. Support viewing same live or recorded video stream at different zoom

levels and areas of interest. e. Support ability to switch from live to recorded video on demand for an

instant replay of recently recorded video. f. Support creation of unlimited views with unique layouts of video

streams. g. Support ability to toggle between tiled and full-screen view. h. Support ability to save configured display setting. i. Support ability to cycle through views (guard tour) based on a specified

interval. j. Supports live or recorded video monitoring of 1 to 64 video streams

simultaneously on a single monitor. k. Supports displaying videos streams in the following standard layouts:

1) Full Screen. 2) 2 x 2. 3) 3 x 3. 4) 4 x 4. 5) 5 x 5. 6) 6 x 6. 7) 8 x 8. 8) 1 + 5. 9) 1 + 7. 10) 1 + 12. 11) 2 + 8.



Page 20 of 28

l. Provides tools to build custom video monitoring layouts.

Video Parameter Controls: Support modifications to the following image quality and image rate parameters for each individual video source: 1. Video streaming format. 2. System optimized recording profile or manual configuration. 3. Keyframe interval. 4. Secondary stream for live viewing. 5. Configure video streaming at a lower image rate when scene is idle. 6. Customize primary and secondary stream on supported cameras.

Camera Controls: Provide the ability to change the following supported video options at the client or video source: 1. Encrypt camera configuration data if supported by camera. 2. Camera passwords from client application. 3. Exposure, iris, IR filter, backlight compensation, gain, priority, sharpening,

saturation, focus, and white balance settings for a video source. 4. Image dimensions for a video source. 5. Rotate image 90, 180 or 270 degrees within a video source. 6. Addition of multiple privacy zones within a video source to block areas from

being viewed or recorded in image field of view. 7. Set a maximum duration for manually triggered recording within a video

source.

Audio Controls: 1. Provides ability to change input, output, gain and volume for an audio source. 2. Supports use of uni-directional and bi-directional audio. 3. Provides ability to link any audio source to any video source.

a. Able to link multiple audio sources to a single video source. b. Able to link an audio source to many video sources.

4. Provides ability to synchronize audio and video on playback. 5. Supports ability to bias displayed video to a lower frame rate or lower image

resolution if there is insufficient network bandwidth or processing power. a. Bias shall not affect video recording. b. Bias shall not affect video exports.

6. Supports ability to independently control if audio source is enabled for the user to monitor and if audio source is recorded with the video source

7. Provides a Virtual Matrix application module supporting remote control of multiple monitor displays, including video walls. Displays simultaneous video streams on connected monitor displays from multiple sites.

8. Displays overlays on top of video images. a. Auto-hiding functional overlays that changes depending on video

streaming mode and device support. Functional overlays include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Button to manually trigger video recording / video recording

indicator. 2) Button to trigger digital output.



Page 21 of 28

3) Button to capture video snapshot. 4) Button to close video stream. 5) Button to reserve a portion of screen for alarm video. 6) Button to enable audio. 7) Button to display POS transactions. 8) Button to maximize video display. 9) Button to trigger single-camera search. 10) Button to grant door access. 11) Click classified object bounding box to initiate Appearance Search. 12) PTZ controls.

b. Information overlays that include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Camera name. 2) Camera location. 3) Playback timestamp with option of displaying device time or local

time. 4) Live timestamp with option of displaying device time or local

time. 5) Recording indicator. 6) Motion activity. 7) Video analytics object detection activity with colored bounding

boxes around moving objects classified as humans or vehicles. 8) Video analytics unusual motion anomaly detection with colored

bounding boxes indicating area of motion. 9) Detected license plate.

9. Supports alarm management operations through video monitoring interface. Including but not limited to: a. Designated tab for reviewing alarms. b. Interface supports sequential viewing of alarms. c. Interface supports sorting of alarms by:

1) Priority. 2) Activation time. 3) Status.

d. Interface supports filtering alarms by status in the following priority: 1) Assigned to me. 2) Active alarms (unassigned). 3) Alarms assigned to others. 4) Acknowledged alarms.

e. Supports ability to assign alarms to user. f. Supports ability to acknowledge alarms. g. Supports ability to bookmark alarms. h. Designate one or more regions in video display area for displaying video

directly linked to triggered alarms or rules.



Page 22 of 28

1) Supports ability to acknowledge alarms from designated video display area.

Site Mapping: Support mapping of the physical locations of cameras and other devices throughout surveillance system. 1. Provide maps with the ability to do the following:

a. Create a hierarchy of interlinked maps. b. Drag and drop objects in system tree onto map. c. Click and display objects from map. d. Drag and drop a video source from map into video viewing area. e. Display a preset area of selected video source. f. Provide customizable map icons. g. Highlight specific cameras when an alarm linked to camera is triggered.

2. Image Size: 3000px by 3000px or 9 MP, maximum. 3. File Formats: Maps may be created from the following file formats:

a. JPEG/JPG. b. BMP. c. PNG. d. GIF.

Playback of Recorded Video and Audio: Support playback of recorded video and audio with the following features: 1. Forward and reverse playback of recorded content at variable speeds. 2. Recorded content plays back synchronously when signal sources are linked. 3. Playback of recorded video from archived long-term storage. 4. The ability to require dual authorization to access features and require specific

user groups to request a second user authentication before recorded video may be displayed.

5. Provide the following methods for navigating recorded video: a. Selectable calendar. b. Horizontal, scrollable timeline:

1) Timeline lists all displayed video sources. 2) Timeline highlights motion and events in recorded video. 3) Video archived to long term storage shall be identified on timeline. 4) Supports a timeline that can display down to quarter second

increments. 5) Supports a timeline that can synchronize video displayed on

multiple tabs to same point in time. 6) Interface supports filtering unusual motion anomaly events on the

timeline by rarity, duration and type.

Search of Recorded Video and Audio: Allow for searching of recorded content with the following functionality: 1. Support recorded video search with the following selectable parameters:

a. Time. b. Date.



Page 23 of 28

c. Event type. d. Visual search based on a pre-defined image area, or image thumbnail:

1) Thumbnails can be based on entire image region or a pre-selected area.

2) Thumbnails can be stacked to support an automatic secondary search when looking at a large timespan of video.

e. Pixel motion in user defined areas. f. Classified object motion detection in user defined areas on supported

video analytics sources. g. Bookmarks. h. Video source. i. Point of sale transactions. j. Alarm. k. License plate detection events.

2. Support object appearance search across multiple cameras: a. Ability to search for a person or vehicle of interest in recorded video

from multiple cameras in the current or alternative site to return possible matches. 1) Automatically enhance person search by utilizing face

characteristics to match similar people from supported cameras. 2) Supported cameras with self-learning video analytics capabilities

that are connected to an NVR with a supported GPU accessory should be able to return possible matches for search.

b. Ability to initiate an appearance search of recorded video for similar persons or similar vehicles based on a specific user selected object in a video scene

c. Ability to initiate an appearance search of recorded video by description: 1) Using one or more personal characteristics: gender, age category

(child vs adult), hair color, upper body color, lower body color d. Ability to initiate search from recorded video in Client application or

dedicated player. e. Supports reviewing search results and confirmation of correct matches. f. Supports editing search parameters including:

1) Cameras included in search. 2) Time range for search.

g. Supports playback of search results, including: 1) Recorded video associated with individual results. 2) Sequential playback of recorded video associated with confirmed

to be correct matches. h. Supports exporting video associated with results, including:

1) Recorded video associated with one of more selected results. 2) Recorded video associated with confirmed to be correct matches. 3) Redacting video for privacy to blur the resulting video except for

the objects selected in the results



Page 24 of 28

i. Supports creation of bookmarks for results, including: 1) One or more selected results. 2) Confirmed to be correct matches.

Bookmarking: 1. Supports creating bookmarks for recorded video and audio. Bookmarks can be:

a. Viewed from multiple sources. b. Displayed on timeline during playback. c. Used as a search criteria for recorded video and audio. Search criteria

can include but are not limited to: 1) Name. 2) Description. 3) Bookmark creator.

d. Supports protecting a bookmark so associated video and audio data is never overwritten.

e. Supports private bookmarks that are only visible to user who designated bookmark as private, and system administrator.

Media Exporting: Support the ability to export media and provide the following options: 1. Exports recorded video in the following formats:

a. Native (AVE). b. JPEG. c. PNG. d. TIFF. e. AVI. f. Print.

2. Exports recorded audio in the following formats: a. WAV. b. Native (AVE). c. AVI.

3. Exports a still frame of video as displayed in video preview area: a. Native (AVE). b. JPEG. c. PNG. d. TIFF.

4. Native (AVE) format exported as follows: a. Digitally sign recorded video and audio using 256-bit encryption so

video can be authenticated for evidentiary purposes. b. Protect exported video with a password meeting configurable strength

requirement. c. Able to export video from one or multiple camera streams

simultaneously. d. Supports exporting multiple video segments from different spans of time. e. Supports reviewing of exported or backed-up video and audio in a

dedicated player.



Page 25 of 28

f. Supports playback of exported clips in synchronized, sequential time. g. Supports playback of multiple clips in continuous, sequential order. h. Supports exporting of video in lower frame-rates than originally

recorded. i. Supports exporting of a designated area from camera’s recorded field of

view. j. Supports re-export into Native or other supported formats. k. Provides a record of video source with the following metadata:

1) Camera model. 2) Firmware version. 3) Location. 4) MAC address. 5) Serial number. 6) Resolution.

Version Upgrade: Provide a process for upgrading versions: 1. Upgrading server software shall not require physical access to servers.

a. Launch upgrades from client interface. b. All connected servers and clients shall receive a distribution of new

version upgrade. 1) The administrator can manually trigger upgrade of each server.

c. The user shall be able to monitor upgrade progress from client interface. 2. Upgrading number of connected devices or upgrading to enterprise version

only requires a change in license key. 3. Upgrade from one version to another occurs without having to uninstall

application and previous version. 4. Automatically upgrade connected video or audio source device firmware if

applicable. 5. Automatically prompt user to upgrade client application if it is out of date with

respect to server software.

2.9 HARDWARE

Supported Applications: 1. Summary: Preload NVMS applications in the following Avigilon hardware:

a. ACC Edge Solution (ES) HD Recorder. b. ACC ES Analytics Appliance. c. ACC ES 8-Port Appliance. d. Avigilon HD Video Appliance. e. Avigilon HD Network Video Recorder. f. Avigilon HD Network Video Recorder Workstation.

Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed (OFCI) Hardware: 1. Configure NVMS to run as a service to automatically start when server or

workstation is powered on. 2. The NVMS allows users to monitor and administer system from:



Page 26 of 28

a. A single client application for monitoring live and recorded video and audio.

b. A single window for administrating all system connections. c. A single tab for monitoring overall system health including:

1) All sites connected in parent-child relationships. 2) Any connected analytic appliances in the site. 3) Any connected Access Control systems. 4) Server-side License Plate Recognition processes. 5) Server-side Analytic Service processes with peak load information. 6) Ability to export health report to Portable Document Format

(PDF). d. Each client with access to a local or distributed network.

3. The NVMS provides a maintenance log and audit trail of all system errors and events.

4. The NVMS provides multiple levels of system redundancy: a. Cluster and synchronize at least 100 servers into a unified site.

1) In the event of a server failure, system can continue running and allow other servers to take over failed server’s tasks.

b. Centralized system administration: 1) Site and server configuration details are replicated to each server in

the site. 2) Sites can be organized in a hierarchical parent-child relationship

where parent can always control child site settings. c. Connect a video or audio source to multiple servers to achieve redundant

recording. d. Create a failover connection for a video or audio source between servers

in a site. 5. The NVMS provides the capability to replace malfunctioning video or audio

sources with a new device and associate old recorded video with the new device.

6. The NVMS provides capability to rename all sites, servers, and video and audio sources.

Peripherals: 1. The NVMS provides ability to control client application using the following

types of peripherals: a. A USB keyboard and/or mouse b. A USB joystick. c. A PTZ controller keyboard.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

HD NVR Analytics Kit: 1. NVIDIA Quadro P1000 GPU:

a. Support minimum of 4 GB of on-board GPU memory. b. Support NVIDIA Pascal™ or NVIDIA Maxwell™ architecture



Page 27 of 28

c. Support an NVIDIA CUDA Compute Capability 5.2 or 6.1 d. Support Windows x86_64 Driver Version 410.48 or above

ACC-USB-JOY-PRO — Avigilon USB Professional Joystick Keyboard.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Prior to installation, configure and test Avigilon Control Center (ACC) Network Video Management System according to manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Install system according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

Systems Integration: 1. Develop, install, and test software and databases for complete and proper

operation of systems involved. 2. Setup and program entire system such that no additional programming is

required including setup all available software features. 3. Perform a full system back-up at completion of initial programming and

deliver configuration to Owner. 4. Perform field software changes after the initial programming session to “fine

tune” operating parameters and sequence of operations based on revisions to the Owner’s operating requirements.

Test equipment and configure system in accordance with instructions provided by manufacturer prior to installation.

Provide products with latest and most up-to-date firmware by manufacturer or provide firmware of a version as specified by provider of Video Management Appliance (VMA) or Network Video Recorder (NVR).

Review configurable features of device with Owner’s Representative and establish a punch list for standard, device specific, location specific and VMA/NVR specific configuration of device(s). 1. Program and configure devices in accordance with this punch list so no

additional programming is required for operation by user.

Configure equipment requiring users to log on using a password with user/site-specific password/passwords. 1. No system/product default passwords allowed.

3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

Demonstration: 1. Demonstrate administration and operation of devices described by this section.



Page 28 of 28

2. Demonstrate how to authorize users and applications to operate and configure installed devices.

3. Demonstrate how an authorized user can gain access to and make changes to configuration.

4. Demonstrate how to operate functionality configured for this project as defined by configuration punch list.

Fine Tuning: 1. Perform field software changes after initial programming session to “fine tune”

operating parameters and sequence of operations based on any revisions to Owner’s operating requirements.



manufacturer.

Device Configuration Backup: 1. Using manufacturer’s backup software tool or VMA/NVR, perform a full

system back-up at completion of initial programming. 2. Deliver configuration backup files, restoration application and instructions

detailing for restoration of back-up configuration.

END OF SECTION


CAMERA BOM


SECTION 28 23 01

CAMERA BOM

PART 1 GENERAL


Bill of Materials for Security System

Mounting Height and Orientation of Cameras

1.2 WATER TREATMENT PLANT


CAMERA BOM



CAMERA BOM



CAMERA BOM



CAMERA BOM


1.3 RAW WATER INTAKE


CAMERA BOM


END OF SECTION

Date post:	01-Sep-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times